Contents

Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 611
1 of 611

Summary of Content for Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual PDF

2017 Accord Coupe

OWNERS MANUAL

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 0

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

00X31-T3L-6401 2017 Accord Coupe

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

Owner's Manual AOM05713

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 1

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels - on the vehicle. Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:

Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.

3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 2

Contents

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

2 Safe Driving P. 29 For Safe Driving P. 30 Seat Belts P. 34 Airbags P. 41

2 Instrument Panel P. 69 Indicators P. 70 Gauges and Displays P. 98

2 Controls P. 115 Clock P. 116 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 118 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 139 Adjusting the Seats P. 161

2 Features P. 185 Audio System P. 186 Audio System Basic Operation P. 192, 215 Customized Features P. 298, 316 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* P. 340

2 Driving P. 411 Before Driving P. 412 Towing a Trailer P. 417 Refueling P. 497 Fuel Economy P. 499

2 Maintenance P. 501 Before Performing Maintenance P. 502 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 535 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 549

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 555 Tools P. 556 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 557 Overheating P. 570 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 572

2 Information P. 581 Specifications P. 582 Identification Numbers P. 586 Emissions Testing P. 589 Warranty Coverages P. 591

Contents

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 3

Child Safety P. 54 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66 Safety Labels P. 67

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 129 Security System P. 133 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 136 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 140 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 159 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 169 Climate Control System P. 180

Audio Error Messages P. 286 General Information on the Audio System P. 291 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 343, 374 Compass* P. 409

When Driving P. 421 Braking P. 479 Parking Your Vehicle P. 491 Accessories and Modifications P. 500

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 513 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537 Battery P. 546 Remote Transmitter Care P. 547 Cleaning P. 550

Engine Does Not Start P. 563 Jump Starting P. 566 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 569 Fuses P. 576 Emergency Towing P. 580

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 587 Reporting Safety Defects P. 588 Authorized Manuals P. 593 Customer Service Information P. 594

Quick Reference Guide P. 4

Safe Driving P. 29

Instrument Panel P. 69

Controls P. 115

Features P. 185

Driving P. 411

Maintenance P. 501

Handling the Unexpected P. 555

Information P. 581

Index P. 598

4

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 4

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

System Indicators (P 70)

Gauges (P 98)

Information Display* (P 99)

Audio System (P 192, 215)

ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 141)

Rear Window Defogger (P 155)

Ignition Switch*1 (P 140)

ECON Button (P 441)

(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System OFF) Button (P 472)

Parking Sensor System Button* (P 493)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button* (P 475)

Hazard Warning Button

Audio/Information Screen (P 193, 216)

Multi-Information Display* (P 102)

Navigation System* () See Navigation System Manual

Audio/Information Touch Screen* (P 218)

Auxiliary Input Jack* (P188)

Climate Control System (P 180)

Heated Mirror Button* (P 155)

Center Pocket (P 172)

Seat Heater Switches* (P 179)

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button* (P 461)

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button* (P 486)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 5

(+ / (- / / Buttons (P 190)

SOURCE Button (P 190)

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink System Voice Control Buttons (P 343, 374)

Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* (P 235), () See Navigation System Manual

Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 158)

Wipers/Washers (P 152)

Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 432, 436)

Brightness Control (P 154)

(Select/Reset) Knob (P 99)

(Display) Button (P 193, 216)

Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 432, 436)

LaneWatchTM*(P 473)

Fog Lights* (P 147)

Headlights/Turn Signals (P 145)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons* (P 448)

(Information) Buttons* (P 102)

SEL/RESET Button* (P 103)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button* (P 466)

Horn (Press an area around .)

Cruise Control Buttons (P 442)

Distance Button* (P 455)

MENU Button* (P 190)

* Not available on all models

5

Visual Index

6

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 6

Door Mirror Controls (P 160)

Passengers Front Airbag (P 44)

Parking Brake (P 479)

Glove Box (P 171)

Rearview Mirror (P 159)

Hood Release Handle (P 515)

Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 128)

Power Window Switches (P 136)

Interior Fuse Box (P 578)

Drivers Front Airbag (P 44)

Trunk Main Switch* (P 131)

Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 498)

Trunk Release (P 129)

Shift Lever Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (P 430)

Automatic Transmission (P 434)

Manual Transmission (P 438)

USB Port (P 187)

Accessory Power Socket (P 174)

Wireless Charger* (P 175)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 7

Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)

Sun Visors

Vanity Mirrors

Map Lights (P 170)

Front Seat (P 161)

LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)

Side Curtain Airbags (P 50)

Grab Handle

Ceiling Light (P 169)

Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 61)

Rear Seat (P 168)

Accessory Power Socket (P 174)

Sunglasses Holder (P 178)

Moonroof Switch* (P 139)

Seat Belts (P 34)

Side Airbags (P 48)

Coat Hook (P 177)

USB Port* (P 187)

* Not available on all models

7

Visual Index

8

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 8

Maintenance Under the Hood (P 513)

Windshield Wipers (P 152, 535)

Tires (P 537, 557)

Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 121)

Power Door Mirrors (P 160)

Headlights (P 145, 529)

How to Refuel (P 498)

High-Mount Brake Light (P 534)

Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 132)

Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 129)

Parking Lights (P 145, 531, 532)

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 145, 531, 532)

Fog Lights* (P 147, 531)

Multi-View Rear Camera (P 496)

Trunk Release Button* (P 130)

Brake Lights (P 533)

Rear Side Marker/Taillights (P 533)

Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 533)

Back-Up Lights (P 533)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 9

Eco Assist System (P 441)

Ambient Meter Changes color to reflect your driving

style. Green: Fuel efficient driving Light green: Moderate acceleration/ deceleration White: Aggressive acceleration/ deceleration

The ambient meter color changes in accordance with your brake or accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Button (P 441) Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 81) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

Ambient Meter

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.

Models with multi-information display

* Not available on all models

9

10

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 10

Safe Driving (P 29)

Airbags (P 41)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 54)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 66)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P 33)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P 34)

Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 11

Instrument Panel (P 69)

Canada

U.S.

Low Fuel Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Canada

U.S.

Washer Level Indicator*

System Indicators Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Lights Indicators Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator*

Immobilizer System Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

System Indicators

CRUISE CONTROL Indicator*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)*

CRUISE MAIN Indicator*

Tachometer

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Security System Alarm Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator*

Gauges (P 98)/Information Display* (P 99)/ Multi-Information Display* (P 102)/System Indicators (P 70)

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

System Indicators

Temperature Gauge

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator

Maintenance Minder Indicator*

Smart Entry System Indicator*

Starter System Indicator*

System Message Indicator*

ECON mode Indicator

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator*

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator* Light Control Indicator*

Door and Trunk Open Indicator

Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Canada

U.S.

Models with information display

Models with information display

Auto High-Beam Indicator (Green)*/ Auto High-Beam Indicator (Amber)*

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)*

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White)*

Parking Sensor System Indicator*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (White)*

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

Automatic transmission models

* Not available on all models

11

12

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 12

Controls (P 115)

Clock (P 116)

The audio system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

a Select , then select Settings.

b Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment.

c Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting / .

d Select OK to set the time.

Models with two displays

3 4

a Enter the Clock Adjustment screen. 2 Adjusting the Clock (P 116)

b Rotate to change hour, then press .

c Rotate to change minute, then press .

Models with one display

ENGINE START/STOP Button* (P 141)

Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 13

Turn Signals (P 145)

Lights (P 145)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers (P 152)

*1: Models with automatic intermittent wipers *2: Models without automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before cleaning the windshield or driving through a car wash.

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring (-: Low Sensitivity*1

(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High Sensitivity*1

(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

Steering Wheel (P 158)

To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.

Unlocking the Doors from the Inside (P 126)

Pull either door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.

Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks the passengers door.

* Not available on all models

13

14

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 14

Trunk (P 129)

To unlock and open the trunk: Pull the trunk release. Press the trunk release button on the remote

transmitter or the smart entry remote. Press the trunk release button* on the

trunk lid.

Trunk Release

Power Door Mirrors (P 160)

With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move the selector switch to L or R.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P 136)

With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open and close the power windows.

If the power window lock button is in the off position, the passengers window can be opened and closed with its own switch.

If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), the passengers window switch is disabled.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Power Window Lock Button

Window Switch

Indicator

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 15

Climate Control System (P 180)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 235) Models with navigation system

Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons

(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard vents.

AUTO Button

(On/Off) Button

(Recirculation) ButtonMODE Control Button

/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons

* Not available on all models

15

16

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 16

Features (P 185)

Audio Remote Controls (P 190)

(+ / (- Button Press to adjust the volume up/down.

SOURCE Button

FMAMCDUSBiPod Bluetooth AudioPandora*AUX

FMAMSiriusXM*CDUSBiPod Pandora*Bluetooth AudioAudio Apps

(+ / (- / / Button

SOURCE Button

Models with one display

Models with two displays

/ Button Radio:Press to change the preset station.

Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.

CD/USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 17

Audio System (P 192, 215)

(P 192)Models with one display

Audio/Information Screen

BACK Button

FM/AM Button

(Skip/Seek) Button

Selector Knob

Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

CD Button AUX Button CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

SETTINGS Button

(Skip/Seek) Button

PHONE Button

MENU Button

DISP Button

* Not available on all models

17

18

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 18

(Power) Button

(HOME) Icon

VOL (Volume) Icons

(MENU) Icon

(BACK) Icon

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

App List

(P215) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Models with two displays

MAP *

*

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 19

Driving (P 411)

M Indicator

Shift Indicator

Manual Transmission* (P 438)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)* (P 430)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting

Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Drive (S) Better acceleration. Increased engine

braking. Going up or down

hills. 7-speed manual shift

mode can be used.

Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.

Press the release button to move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.

Reverse Used when reversing.

Drive Normal driving. 7-speed mode can be used

temporarily.

Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode (P 432) Allows you to manually shift

the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.

When the shift lever is in (S Pulling a paddle shifter changes

the mode from continuously variable transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode.

The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.

When the shift lever is in (D Pulling a paddle shifter

temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator.

Shift Lever

Release Button

* Not available on all models

19

20

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 20

Automatic Transmission* (P 434)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting

Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.

Neutral Transmission is not locked.

Drive (S) Sequential shift mode can be used.

Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.

Press the release button to move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.

Reverse Used when reversing.

Drive Normal driving. D-paddle shift mode can be used

Shift Lever

Release Button

M Indicator

Gear Position Indicator

Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter

Paddle Shifters (P 436) Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual

transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.

D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.

Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on.

The selected gear position is shown in the instrument panel.

Selected Gear Number

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 21

VSA OFF Button (P 472)

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.

VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.

To turn VSA on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P 442)

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To use cruise control, press the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button, then press the /SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 475)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.

The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.

A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button* (P 483)

When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.

To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

* Not available on all models

21

22

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 22

Refueling (P 497)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or higher required

Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)

a Push the fuel fill door release handle.

b Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap.

c Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

d After refueling, screw the cap back on until it clicks at least once.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 23

Honda SensingTM*

TM

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located at the lower part of the front bumper and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Front Sensor Camera

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (P 447)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System (P 460)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 464)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 483)

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

* Not available on all models

23

24

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 24

Maintenance (P 501)

Under the Hood (P 513)

Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.

Check brake fluid and clutch* fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.

Lights (P 529)

Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P 535)

Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.

Tires (P 537)

Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 25

Handling the Unexpected (P 555)

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

Flat Tire (P 557)

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.

Indicators Come On (P 572)

Identify the indicator and consult the owners manual.

Engine Wont Start (P 563)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P 576)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.

Overheating (P 570)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing (P 580)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

* Not available on all models

25

26

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 26

What to Do If

*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q. Why?

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key.

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why?

The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system*1

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system*1

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system*1

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 27

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.

2 ABS operation (P 481)

Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?

The beeper sounds when: The key is left in the ignition switch*. The power mode* is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on.

* Not available on all models

27

28

Q u

ick R eferen

ce G u

id e

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 28

Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Im seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 475)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 29

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 30 Your Vehicles Safety Features............ 32 Safety CheckList................................. 33

Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 34 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 37 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 40

Airbags Airbag System Components............... 41 Types of Airbags ................................ 44 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 44

Side Airbags ...................................... 48 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 50 Airbag System Indicators.................... 51 Airbag Care ....................................... 53

Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54 Safety of Infants and Small Children.......56 Safety of Larger Children ................... 64

Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 66

Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 67

29

30

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 30

For Safe Driving

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 31

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

31

32

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicles Safety Features

Safe D rivin

g

1Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 32

Your Vehicles Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

6

7

8

9

10

11

Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks

Side Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

7

7

99

8

8

10

10

6

11

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety CheckList Safe D

rivin g

1Safety CheckList

If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes off.

2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 77

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 33

Safety CheckList For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.

Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 164

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 37

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a childs age, height and weight.

2 Child Safety P. 54

33

34

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 34

Seat Belts

1About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow the belt to extend fully without locking.

3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers

Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 61

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D

rivin g

1About Your Seat Belts

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 54

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 35

Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 before the drivers seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.

The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the drivers and front passengers seat belts are fastened.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Seat Belt Reminder

*

Continued 35* Not available on all models

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

36

Safe D rivin

g

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 36

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D

rivin g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 37

Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

Pull out slowly.

Correct Seated Posture.

Latch Plate

Buckle

37Continued

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

38

Safe D rivin

g

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 38

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

Lap belt as low as possible

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D

rivin g

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.

When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 39

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

39

40

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Safe D rivin

g

1Seat Belt Inspection

3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 40

Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 41

Airbags

Safe D

rivin g

8

11

Airbag System Components

6

7

8

9

8

8

8 810

12

41Continued

42

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 42

The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that continually monitors and can record information about the sensors, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The drivers and front passengers seat belts incorporate sensors that detect whether or not they are fastened.

fA drivers seat position sensor. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force.

gWeight sensors in the front passengers seat. The front passengers airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child).

h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passengers front airbag has been turned off.

jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

kSafing Sensor

lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbag.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D

rivin g

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 43

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Important Facts About Your Airbags

43

44

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple- threshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 44

Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Housing Locations

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 45

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Operation

How the Front Airbags Work

Continued 45

46

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 46

When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D

rivin g

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver's seating position.

For both advanced front airbags to work properly: Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. Do not put any object under the passengers seat. Make sure any objects are positioned properly on

the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Do not place any cover over the passenger side dashboard.

Make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

2 Floor Mats P. 551

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 47

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver's advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors.

Although we recommend against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger's front airbag.

Advanced Airbags

Drivers Seat Position Sensor

Passengers Seat Weight Sensors

47

48

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Side Airbags

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 48

Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the drivers and passengers seat- backs.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

Housing Locations

Housing Location

Operation

When inflated

Side Airbag

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 49

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe

It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

49

50

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe D rivin

g

1Side Curtain Airbags

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger seat.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 50

Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D

rivin g

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 51

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display*.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you dont, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

*

Continued 51* Not available on all models

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

52

Safe D rivin

g

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passengers seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as:

An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.

The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

An object placed under the front passengers seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 52

When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passengers weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 54

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passengers front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

U.S. Canada

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D

rivin g

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 53

Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

53

54

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 54

Child Safety

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.

Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

2 Safety Labels P. 67

3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 55

Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

55

56

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe D rivin

g

1Protecting Infants

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.

3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 56

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.

2 Airbags P. 41

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 57

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Protecting Smaller Children

Continued 57

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

58

Safe D rivin

g

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 58

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Selecting a Child Seat

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 59

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Marks

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

Flexible Type

59Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

60

Safe D rivin

g

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 60

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.

4. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 61

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat manufacturer's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 2 4.

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

Continued 61

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

62

Safe D rivin

g

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 62

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D

rivin g

1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 63

A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security.

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage point and lift the cover.

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.

2. Remove the head restraint. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 165

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. u Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

5. Reinstall the head restraint. u Make sure to adjust the head restraint in

its highest position. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 165

Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchorage Points

Cover

Anchor

Outer Position Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Center Position Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Rear outer seating positions

Rear center seating position

All positions

Rear center seating position

63

64

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe D rivin

g

1Safety of Larger Children

3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 64

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist Do the child's knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child's neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child's thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D

rivin g

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 65

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

Booster Seats

Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

65

66

Safe D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 66

Exhaust Gas Hazard

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 67

Safety Labels

Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels

Safe D rivin

g

carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Radiator Cap

U.S. models only Dashboard

67

68

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 68

* Not available on all m

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 69

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

odels

Indicators ............................................ 70 Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 88

Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* .................... 90

Gauges and Displays Gauges.............................................. 98 Information Display*.......................... 99 Multi-Information Display*............... 102

69

70

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 70

Indicators

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off if the parking brake has been released.

Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.

Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.

Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released.

Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.

2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 574

Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 574

Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

(Red)

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 71

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 572

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If readiness codes have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.

Blinks when a misfire in the engines cylinders is detected.

Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 589 Comes on while driving - Have your

vehicle checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe

place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 573

Charging System Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.

Comes on when the battery is not charging.

Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.

2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 572

71Continued* Not available on all models

72

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 72

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Shift Lever Position Indicator*

Indicates the current shift lever position.

2 Shifting P. 430, 434

Models with information display

Models with multi- information display

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 73

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator

Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is applied.

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 432

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is applied.

2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 436

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Models with information display

Models with multi- information display

Automatic transmission models

Models with information display

Models with multi- information display

73Continued* Not available on all models

74

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 74

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Transmission Indicator*

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.

Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.

Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 35

Models with information display

Models with multi- information display

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 75

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Low Fuel Indicator

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 481

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

75Continued* Not available on all models

76

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 76

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Blinks when VSA is active. Comes on if there is a problem with

the VSA system or hill start assist system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 471

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) OFF Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on when you deactivate VSA.

2 VSA OFF Button P. 472

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 77

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Door and Trunk Open Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if either door or the trunk is not completely closed.

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if either door or the trunk is opened while driving.

Goes off when both doors and the trunk are closed.

Parking Sensor System Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with the parking sensor system.

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.

Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 574

Models with information display

Models with multi- information display

77Continued* Not available on all models

78

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 78

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

May come on briefly if the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.

Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires pressures are

determined to be significantly low. - The system has not been calibrated.

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 475

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 79

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

System Message Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the multi-information display appears at the same time.

While the indicator is on, press the

(information) button to see the message again.

Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the multi-information display. Take the appropriate action for the message.

The multi-information display does not return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the button is pressed.

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.

Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 532, 531, 533

High Beam Indicator

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.

79Continued* Not available on all models

80

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 80

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Fog Light Indicator*

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

Immobilizer System Indicator

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w *1 again.

Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Security System Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 133

Indicator

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 81

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

ECON Mode Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on when you press the ECON button.

2 ECON Button P. 441

CRUISE MAIN Indicator*

Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.

2 Cruise Control P. 442

CRUISE CONTROL Indicator*

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control P. 442

Washer Level Indicator*

Comes on when the washer fluid gets low.

Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid

P. 528

Maintenance Minder Indicator*

Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505

81Continued* Not available on all models

82

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 82

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Smart Entry System Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON.

Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system or push button starting system.

Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Starter System Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if the starter system has a problem.

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Light Control Indicator*

Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system or low beam headlights*.

Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on manually and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 83

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Auto High-Beam Indicator (Green)*

Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met.

2 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* P. 148

Auto High-Beam Indicator (Amber)*

Comes on if there is a problem with the auto high-beam.

Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam

headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Comes on when the area around the camera on the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

If the indicator does not go off after cleaning the lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

83Continued* Not available on all models

84

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 84

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off.

Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 85

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC.

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.

May come on when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)

ACC has been automatically canceled.

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dear if the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (White)*

Comes on when you press the MAIN button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447

Comes on if the temperature inside the camera is too high.

ACC has been automatically canceled.

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.

Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing the MAIN button can resume the system.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447

85Continued* Not available on all models

86

uu Indicatorsu

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 86

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White)*

Comes on when you press the MAIN button. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

P. 464

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 87

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message*

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator*

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.

Comes on when you deactivate the CMBSTM. A multi-information display message appears for five seconds.

Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM.

Stays on constantly without the CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483

Comes on when the CMBSTM system shuts itself off.

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483

Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

87* Not available on all models

88

uu Indicatorsu Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 88

Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

The following messages appear only on the information display.

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. 2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 573

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 89

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after moving the shift lever to (P .

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.

Appears when the smart entry remotes battery becomes weak.

Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547

Models with smart entry system

Automatic transmission/CVT models

U.S. manual transmission models

Canadian models

89

90

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 90

Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the (information) button to see the message again

with the system message indicator on.

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 573

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and

Maintenance Past Due follow.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi- Information Display P. 510

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 570

Appears if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system.

Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if there is a problem with the low beam headlights.

Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 91

Message Condition Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the auto high- beam.

Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Appears when the area around the camera on the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

If the message does not disappear after cleaning the lens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system. The beeper sounds.

Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.

Appears when the washer fluid is low. Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 528

Models with auto high-beam

Models with auto high-beam

Models with parking sensor system

Canadian models

91Continued

92

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 92

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the ignition key is turned to ACCESSORY (q from ON (w . (The drivers door is closed.)

Appears when you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q .

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the key.

Appears when you open the drivers door while the ignition key is in LOCK (0.

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Models without smart entry system

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 93

Message Condition Explanation

Appears after you unlock and open the drivers door.

2 Starting the Engine P. 423

Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .

Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Models with smart entry system

U.S. manual transmission models Canadian models

93Continued

94

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 94

Message Condition Explanation

Appears after the drivers door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.

2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 143

Appears when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak.

Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547

Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. A beeper sounds six times.

Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button to be touched with.

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564

Appears three seconds after the To Start Engine: Brake + Push message appears. 2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141

Appears three seconds after you bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button when To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button appears. To Start Engine: Brake + Push appears sequentially.

2 Changing the Power Mode P. 141

Models with smart entry system

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 95

Message Condition Explanation

Appears while you are customizing the settings and the shift lever is moved out of (P.

2 Customized Features P. 106

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.

Appears when the battery is not charging.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 546

Appears along with the battery charging system indicator - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption.

2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 572

Appears when the starter system has a problem. As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears for about three seconds when ACC has been automatically canceled.

You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

P. 483

95Continued* Not available on all models

96

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 96

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.).

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message appears again after you cleaned the area around the camera.

Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too high.

ACC/LKAS has been automatically canceled.

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. Goes off - The camera has been cooled down. Pressing

the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system. 2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 447 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 464

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* P. 464

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line.

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line.

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* P. 460

You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

When you selected Warning Only

When you selected Normal or Wide

* Not available on all models

uu IndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 97

Message Condition Explanation

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.

2 Indicators P. 70

Message Condition Explanation

Appears when you unlock and open the drivers door while the engine is running by smart entry remote. 2 Remote Engine Start* P. 425

Models with remote engine starter

97* Not available on all models

98

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 98

Gauges and Displays

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

E

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

2 Overheating P. 570

Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Speedometer

Tachometer

Fuel Gauge

Temperature Gauge

uuGauges and Displaysu Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Switching the Display

Each time you press the knob, the information display changes as follows:

Some of the items on the information display also appear on the audio/information screen. They also change along with the information display changes while the fuel consumption is shown.

Instant Fuel Economy, Odometer, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Range, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature

Engine Oil Life

Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B, Outside Temperature

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 99

Information Display*

The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Switching the Display

Select/Reset Knob

99Continued* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display*

100

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.

1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 100

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505

Odometer

Trip Meter

Average Fuel Economy

Instant Fuel Economy

Engine Oil Life

uuGauges and Displaysu Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 101

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the

outside temperature is shown on the information display. u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display

starts showing from -5F to +5F (U.S.) or -3C to +3C (Canada). 3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown. u The adjustment is complete.

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Outside Temperature

Range

101

102

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el Elapsed Time Average Speed

hicle Settings Engine Oil Life

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 102

Multi-Information Display*

The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Main displays Press the (information) button to change the display.

Switching the Display

Average Fuel Economy/ Instant Fuel Economy Range

Blank Screen Ve Button

* Not available on all models

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 103

Lower displays Press the SEL/RESET button to change the display.

Odometer Trip A Trip B

SEL/RESET Button

103Continued

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

104

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

1Average Fuel Economy

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

1Elapsed Time

You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 104

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Odometer

Trip Meter

Average Fuel Economy

Range

Elapsed Time

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

1Average Speed

You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 105

Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 505

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Average Speed

Instant Fuel Economy

Engine Oil Life

Outside Temperature

Continued 105

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

106

In stru

m en

t Pan el

1Customized Features

To customize other features, press the button.

2 List of customizable options P. 109 2 Example of customization settings P. 113

Customization is possible when you see the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen. The drivers ID indicates which remote transmitter you have used to unlock the drivers door. The customized settings are recalled every time you unlock the drivers door with that remote.

When you customize settings: Shift to (P

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 106

Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.

How to customize Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press the SEL/RESET button.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Customized Features

Button: Changes the customize menus and items.

Multi-Information Display: Goes to Vehicle Settings.

SEL/RESET button: Enters the selected item.

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 107

Customization flow Press the button.

SEL/RESETVehicle Settings

Trip A Reset Timing

Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Memory Position Link

Door Unlock Mode

Keyless Access Light Flash

4

4

4

4

TPMS Calibration

Driver Assist System Setup

Meter Setup

Position Setup

Keyless Access Setup

SEL/RESET

SEL/RESET

SEL/RESET

SEL/RESET

Trip B Reset Timing Fuel Efficiency Backlight

4

ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

ACC Display Speed Unit

4 Keyless Start Guidance Screens

SEL/RESET

Keyless Access Beep

Forward Collision Warning Distance

4

4

4

Lane Keep Assist Suspend Beep

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Remote Start System ON/OFF*

107Continued* Not available on all models

108

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 108

Exit

4

4

4

Door Setup

Maintenance Reset

Default All

SEL/RESET

4

SEL/RESET

4

Lighting Setup SEL/RESET

4

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity

4

4

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 109

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate

Driver Assist System Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.

On/Off*1

ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the ACC display speed unit.

mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1

(Canada)

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/Warning Only

Lane Keep Assist Suspend Beep

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

109Continued

110

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 110

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Meter Setup

Language Selection Changes the displayed language. English*1/French/Spanish

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1

Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Driving Position Setup

Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat position to a stored setting.

On*1/Off

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 111

*1: Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Keyless Access Setup

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either door handle.

On*1/Off

Remote Start System ON/OFF* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

Lighting Setup

Interior Light Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

111Continued* Not available on all models

112

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 112

*1: Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Door Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.

All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted To Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built- in key.

Driver Door*1/ All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

Maintenance Reset

Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.

Cancel/Reset

Default All Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default.

Cancel/Set

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display* In

stru m

en t Pan

el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 113

Example of customization settings The steps for changing the Trip A Reset Timing setting to With Refuel are shown below. The default setting for Trip A Reset Timing is Manually Reset.

1. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.

2. Press the button until Meter Setup appears on the display.

3. Press the SEL/RESET button. u Language Selection appears first in the

display.

113Continued

114

uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display*

In stru

m en

t Pan el

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 114

4. Press the button until Trip A Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you can select With Refuel, IGN Off, Manually Reset, or Exit.

5. Press the button and select With Refuel, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The With Refuel Setup screen appears,

then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

6. Press the button until Exit appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button.

7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

* Not available on all m

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 115

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 116 Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions .................. 118 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*... 120 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 121

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 126

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 128 Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 129 Security System

Immobilizer System .......................... 133 Security System Alarm...................... 133

Opening and Closing the Windows ...136 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* ...139

odels

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Ignition Switch*............................... 140 ENGINE START/STOP Button*........... 141 Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ................................... 144

Turn Signals ..................................... 145 Light Switches.................................. 145 Fog Lights* ...................................... 147 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* ........................................ 148

Daytime Running Lights ................... 151 Wipers and Washers ........................ 152 Brightness Control ........................... 154

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 155

Driving Position Memory System* .... 156 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 158

Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 159 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 160

Adjusting the Seats .......................... 161 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 169

Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control .... 180 Synchronized Mode ......................... 182 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 183

115

116

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 116

Clock

1Adjusting the Clock

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

You can turn the clock display on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

Models with one display

1Using the SETTINGS button

To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then press the (6 (Reset) button.

Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00

Adjusting the Clock You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,

then Clock Adjustment. 3. Rotate to change hour, then press . 4. Rotate to change minute, then press .

Using the SETTINGS button 1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)

button until the clock display blinks. 2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to

adjust the time. 3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the

time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Adjusting the Time Models with one display

Models with one display

CLOCK (SETTINGS) Button

(6 (Reset) Button

(4 (Hour) Button

(5 (Minute) Button

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

Models with two displays

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 117

Using the Settings menu on the audio/information touch screen 1. Select , then select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock

Adjustment. 3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting

/ . 4. Select OK to set the time.

Models with two displays

3 4

117

118

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 118

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

1Key Types and Functions

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.

2 Immobilizer System P. 133

The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 425

Models with remote engine starter

Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the key to start and stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk. You can also use the remote transmitter or smart entry system* to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk.

Smart entry remote*

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built- in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks.

Master Keys

Master Key* Smart Entry Remote*

Smart Entry Remote with Remote Engine Starter*

Built-in Key

Release Knob

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions C

o n

tro ls

1Valet Key*

When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key.

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 119

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver's door.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

Valet Key*

Gray

Key Number Tag

119* Not available on all models

120

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

C o

n tro

ls

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 120

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.

Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the remote is within range.

The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.

If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.

You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle after two seconds of locking it.

The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.

Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.

The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547

You can customize the door lock mode and keyless lock acknowledgement setting.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 121

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.

Locking the doors and the trunk Press the door lock button on either door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; both doors and the trunk lock; and the security system sets.

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

Door Lock Button

121Continued* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

122

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically relock.

The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be customized using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 122

Unlocking the vehicle Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice. Grab the passengers door handle: u Both doors and the trunk unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. 2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 130

Trunk Release Button

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately.

2 Interior Lights P. 169

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch.

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter or smart entry system only when the power mode in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 123

Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, both doors

lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u The beeper sounds and verifies the

security system is set.

Using the Remote Transmitter

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

Continued 123

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

124

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 547

You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 124

Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the drivers door unlocks.

Twice: u The passengers door unlocks.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C

o n

tro ls

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When you lock the drivers door with a key, the passengers door locks at the same time. When unlocking, the drivers door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the passengers door.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the drivers door, the passengers door locks at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand before locking the door to prevent it from being locked in the vehicle.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 125

Fully insert the key and turn it.

Locking the drivers door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. u The doors cannot be locked when the key

is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

Locking the passengers door Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

Lock

Unlock

Locking a Door Without Using a Key

125

126

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, the passengers door locks at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 126

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.

Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.

Using the Lock Tab

To Unlock

Lock TabTo Lock

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C

o n

tro ls

1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

The inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 127

Pull the inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one

motion.

Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.

To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be

unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.

Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

Inner Handle

Continued 127* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

128

C o

n tro

ls

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock the drivers door using the master lock switch, the passengers door locks/ unlocks at the same time.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display*, audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 128

Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock both doors.

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Drive lock mode Both doors lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Drivers door open mode Both doors unlock when the drivers door is opened.

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

To Unlock

Master Door Lock Switch

To Lock

Auto Door Locking

Auto Door Unlocking

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 129

Opening and Closing the Trunk

C

o n

tro ls

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66

Using the Trunk Opener Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk Release

129Continued

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*

130

C o

n tro

ls

1Locking the trunk opener

If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.

Models without smart entry system

1Using the Trunk Release Button*

Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.

A person who is not carrying the smart entry remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.

Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the trunk cannot be closed.

Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk lid when closing it.

Do not place the smart entry remote around the rear seat when closing the trunk.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 130

Locking the trunk opener You can lock the trunk release with the master key* or the built-in key*.

Using the Trunk Release Button*

Press the release button on the trunk lid after the doors are unlocked.

Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the smart entry remote. u The beeper will sound.

Trunk Release Button

* Not available on all models

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter C

o n

tro ls

1Trunk Main Switch*

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote by sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a valet key.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 131

Using the Remote Transmitter Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.

Trunk Main Switch*

The trunk main switch disables the trunk release button on the remote transmitter and the trunk release button on the trunk lid to protect luggage in the trunk. 1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded

down. 2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove

box. 3. Lock the glove box. 4. Lock the trunk release.

2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 129

Trunk Button

ON

OFF

Main Switch

131* Not available on all models

132

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

C o

n tro

ls

1Emergency Trunk Opener

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 132

Emergency Trunk Opener The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.

Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.

Lever

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 133

Security System

C

o n

tro ls

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates.

Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the

ENGINE START/STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicles immobilizer system near the ignition

switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button. Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as a television set

and audio system are strongly magnetic, or a key chain can become magnetic, too.

Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system.

However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift lever is moved out of (P (automatic transmission/CVT models) or the hood is opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.

When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.

To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

133Continued

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

134

C o

n tro

ls

1Security System Alarm

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the

emergency trunk opener. Opening the hood with the hood release.

Moving the shift lever out of (P.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 134

Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the

ignition switch. The hood and trunk are closed. Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart

entry system.

When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.

To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The security system indicator goes off at the same time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C

o n

tro ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 135

The panic button on the remote transmitter

If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.

Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Panic Mode

Panic Button

135

136

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 136

Opening and Closing the Windows

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Opening either door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.

The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

3WARNING Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and close both windows.

The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passengers window from the passenger's side.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.

Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

On Off

Power Window Lock Button

IndicatorDrivers Window Switch

Passengers Window Switch

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C

o n

tro ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 137

To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

To open: Press the unlock button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time.

If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function*

Close

Open

Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote*

Unlock Button

137Continued* Not available on all models

138

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 138

To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key*

Close

Open

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 139

Opening and Closing the Moonroof*

C

o n

tro ls

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.

Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Opening/Closing the Moonroof

Open

Close Tilt

139* Not available on all models

140

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 140

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

1Ignition Switch*

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.

If you open the drivers door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out.

When this happens, the following messages appear on the multi-information display: In LOCK (0: Remove Key From Ignition In ACCESSORY (q: Turn Ignition Switch To Lock

(0) Position

If the key wont turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.

3WARNING Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.

Manual transmission models

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

All models

Models with multi-information display

All models

Ignition Switch*

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C

o n

tro ls

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ON mode: Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-information display*.

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.

Operating Range

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 141

ENGINE START/STOP Button*

*1: Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

Changing the Power Mode

Automatic Transmission/CVT Manual Transmission VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off.

Press the button without the shift lever in (P.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Press the button.

Without pressing the clutch pedal

Without pressing the brake pedal

ACCESSORY Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON Indicator in the button is on. All electrical components can be used.

Indicator Indicator

Shift to (P. U.S. models

141Continued* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*

142

C o

n tro

ls

1Changing the Power Mode

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.

Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 142

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.

*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models

Automatic Power Off

Power Mode Reminder

Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

All models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C

o n

tro ls

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

When the smart entry remote is within the systems operational range, and the drivers door is closed, the warning function cancels.

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the systems operational range.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 143

Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it within the systems operational range.

When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the drivers door is closed, warning buzzers sound from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the information display or multi-information display notifies the driver inside that the remote is out.

When the power mode is in ACCESSORY

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.

Smart Entry Remote Reminder

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

143

144

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 144

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

*1:Except U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

Ignition Switch Position

LOCK (0) (with/without the key)

ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)

Without Smart Entry System

Engine is turned off and power is shut down.

The steering wheel is locked.

No electrical components can be used.

Engine is turned off. Some electrical

components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.

Normal key position while driving.

All electrical components can be used.

Use this position to start the engine.

The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.

Power Mode VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

ACCESSORY ON START

With Smart Entry System and ENGINE START/STOP Button

Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and

power is shut down. The steering wheel is

locked*1. No electrical

components can be used.

Indicator-On or blinking Engine is turned off. Some electrical

components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.

Indicator- On (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running) All electrical components

can be used.

Indicator-Off The mode automatically

returns to ON after the engine starts.

Indicator is: On Off

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals C

o n

tro ls

1Light Switches

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

2 Lights On Indicator P. 79

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 145

Turn Signals The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.

Light Switches

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch*1. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Right Turn

Left Turn

Manual Operation

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

145Continued

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

146

C o

n tro

ls

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Light Sensor

Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 146

Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. u You can change the auto light sensitivity

setting. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights* C

o n

tro ls

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at

MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN

Bright

Dark

1Headlight Integration with Wipers*

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

1Fog Lights*

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on.

2 Fog Light Indicator* P. 80

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 147

The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door. u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the drivers door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

Fog Lights*

When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Headlight Integration with Wipers*

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Fog Light Switch

147* Not available on all models

148

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*

C o

n tro

ls

1Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*

The auto high-beam determines when to change the headlight beams by responding to the brightness of the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the following cases, however, the system may not respond to the lights properly: The brightness of the lights from the preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor. Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

fog, windshield frost, etc.). Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric

billboards are illuminating the road ahead. The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes. The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle ahead of you suddenly cuts you off or is

not traveling in the appropriate deirection. Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 148

Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*

Uses the camera attached, monitors the space ahead of your vehicle, and automatically changes the low beam headlights to high beam headlights when necessary.

The headlight switch is in AUTO.

The lever is in the low beam position.

The system recognizes that you are driving at night and the low beam headlights come on.

The vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The system operates when:

The camera is not detecting any lights coming from preceding or oncoming vehicles: The headlights change to high beams.

15-degree

The camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle: The headlights are returned to low beams.

The camera monitors the range within the 30-degree view angle. The distance that the camera can detect lights ahead differs depending on conditions, such as the brightness of the lights and the weather.

The system changes between high and low beam headlights when:

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)* C

o n

tro ls

1To Operate the System

For the auto high-beam to work properly: Do not place an object that reflects light on the

dashboard. Keep the windshield around the camera clean.

When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.

Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area around the camera.

Do not touch the camera lens.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on the camera.

If the Can Not Operate: message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place. Wipe away debris blocking the windshield, then start driving again. If the message remains on even after driving for a while with the clean windshield, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with multi-information display

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 149

Turn the headlight switch in AUTO and pull the headlight lever to low beam.

2 Light Switches P. 145

The auto high-beam indicator (Green) comes on.

Temporary cancellation The auto high-beam operation is temporarily canceled while: You are continuously driving at a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h). The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h). The windshield wipers run at high speed for more than a few seconds.

The system operation resumes once the condition that caused it to cancel improves.

To Operate the System

Headlight Switch

Continued 149

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam (High Beam Support System)*

150

C o

n tro

ls

1To Disable the System

The auto high-beam will remain in the selected disabled or enabled setting each time you start the engine.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 150

Disable the system when the vehicle is parked with the ignition switch in ON (w *1 and the light switch is in the AUTO position. To disable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 40 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink twice. To enable the system: Pull the light switch lever towards you and hold it for 30 seconds. The auto high-beam indicator in the meter will blink once.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

To Disable the System

AUTO Position

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights C

o n

tro ls

1Daytime Running Lights

The daytime running lights come on dimmer when the headlight switch is in than when it is in AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark, the low beam headlights come on.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 151

Daytime Running Lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met:

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. The headlight switch is off, or in . The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models with bulb type parking lights

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Models with bulb type parking lights

151

152

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

C o

n tro

ls

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage them. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove the obstacle.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 152

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO, HI)

Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. *2: Models with manual intermittent operation *3: Models with automatic intermittent operation

Windshield Wiper/Washer

MIST

INT*2/AUTO*3

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull to use washer.

Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C

o n

tro ls

1Wipers and Washers

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situation in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present

Rainfall Sensor

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 153

When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.

AUTO sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rain fall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

Adjustment Ring

Low Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

153* Not available on all models

154

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

C o

n tro

ls

1Brightness Control

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.

Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the display.

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the parking lights are on.

The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 154

Brightness Control When the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The information display*/multi-information display* will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the information display*/multi-information display* while you are adjusting it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Control Knob

On information display

On multi-information display

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button C

o n

tro ls

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 155

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32F (0C) or below, they do not automatically switch off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

155* Not available on all models

156

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

C o

n tro

ls

1Driving Position Memory System*

Using the multi-information display*, audio/ information screen* or audio/information touch screen*, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

System Operation The system will not operate if: The vehicle speed is above 2 mph (3 km/h). Either memory position button is pressed while the

seat is in motion. The seat position is adjusted while in operation. The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 156

Driving Position Memory System*

You can store two drivers seat positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.

The multi-information display* shows you which remote you used to unlock the vehicle when you enter.

DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System* C

o n

tro ls

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: You do not press the memory button within five

seconds. You readjust the seat position before the double-

beep. You set the power mode to any position except

ON.

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat will stop moving if you: Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or

(2). Adjust the seat position.

Shift into any position except (P.

Release the parking brake.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 157

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the drivers seat to the desired position.

2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory

button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2

within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat position has been

memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.

1. Move the shift lever to (P .

2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.

Storing a Position in Memory

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

SET Button

Recalling the Stored Position

Memory Button 1

Memory Button 2

Automatic transmission/CVT models

All models

157

158

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

C o

n tro

ls

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.

3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 158

Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators. 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

To adjust

To lockLever

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 159

Adjusting the Mirrors

C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 161

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R.

Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you, based in inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature is always active.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*

Tab

Daytime Position

Night Position

Up

Down

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

Sensor

Up

Down

159* Not available on all models

160

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 160

Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 161

Adjusting the Seats

C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Adjusting the Seat Positions Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.

Adjusting the drivers power seat*

Move back.

Allow sufficient space.

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Lumbar Support Adjustment

161Continued* Not available on all models

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

162

C o

n tro

ls

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 162

Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.

Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.

Drivers seat is shown.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions C

o n

tro ls

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 163

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Adjusting the Seat-Backs

163

164

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

C o

n tro

ls

1Head Restraints

In order for the head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs. Do not place any object between an occupant and

the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.

3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 164

Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions

Position head in the center of the head restraint.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints C

o n

tro ls

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

To remove the rear outer head restraints, fold down the seat-back first.

2 Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 168

3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 165

A passenger sitting in the center back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

165

166

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

C o

n tro

ls

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 166

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position C

o n

tro ls

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip over the front seat belt. If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the seat-back forward.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 167

Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seat- back forward.

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever tilts the seat-back forward.

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever, or pushing down the front passenger seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back forward. You can also use these levers to move the seat forward.

Rear Seat Access

Fold-down Lever

Driver side

Models with drivers power seat

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever

Models with drivers manual seat

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever

Release Lever

Passenger side

167

168

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

C o

n tro

ls

1Folding Down the Rear Seat

The rear seat-back can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.

Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.

2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 52

Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 168

Rear Seats

1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the guide.

2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.

3. Fold the seat-back down.

If the rear head restraints get caught on the front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.

2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 165

Folding Down the Rear Seat

Guide

Center Shoulder Belt

Release Lever

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 169

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

C

o n

tro ls

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.

When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door.

When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door.

You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the driver's door. When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

When you close the driver's door with the key in the ignition switch.

When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY mode.

If you leave either door open without the key in the ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Interior Lights

ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When either of the doors are opened. You unlock the driver's door.

You remove the key from the ignition switch.

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Interior Light Switches

Door Activated Position

Off

Door Activated Position

On

Off

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

169Continued

uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights

170

C o

n tro

ls

1Map Lights

When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated position and either door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 170

The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.

Map Lights

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Glove Box

3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 171

Interior Convenience Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

You can lock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key.

Pull the handle to open the console compartment.

Glove Box

Glove Box

Handle

To Lock

Console Compartment

171Continued

172

uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 172

Pull the handle to open the pocket.

Center Pocket

Handle

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 173

Front seat beverage holders

Door beverage holders

Rear seat beverage holders

Beverage Holders

Continued 173

uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items

174

C o

n tro

ls

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.

When both sockets are being used, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 180 watts (15 amps).

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 174

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.

Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it.

Accessory power socket (console compartment)

Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Accessory Power Sockets

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Wireless Charger*

This system consumes a lot of power, so do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the users manual that came with to the compatible device you want to charge.

3CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. Always remove foreign objects from

the charge pad before charging the device.

Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.

Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.

Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.

Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.

Avoid using spraying hair spray, insecticides, etc, that may contact the charge pad surface.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 175

To use the wireless charger, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

1. To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button. u When the system is activated, the green

indicator light comes on. 2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area. u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system, and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

3. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on. u Depending on the device, the amber

indicator light will stay on.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Wireless Charger*

Green Indicator

Amber Indicator

Charging Area (Power)

Button

Continued 175* Not available on all models

uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items

176

C o

n tro

ls

1Wireless Charger*

NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can go wrong.

Qi and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: The device is already fully charged. The temperature of the device is extremely high

while charging. You are at a place that emits strong

electromagnetic wave or noises such as TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when: Both doors or the trunk are closed

- to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the smart entry system.

The position of the device is altered.

Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 176

When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator Cause Solution

Green &

Amber

Blinking simulta- neously

There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.

Remove the obstacle(s).

The device is not within the charging area.

Move the device to the center of the charging area where is located.

Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty. Contact a dealer for repairs.

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Coat Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.

1Cargo Hooks

Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 177

There are coat hooks behind the center pillar on both sides. Pull them down to use them.

The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.

Coat Hooks

Cargo Hooks

Continued 177

uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items

178

C o

n tro

ls

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 178

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.

Sunglasses Holder

Push

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C

o n

tro ls

1Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.

3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 179

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on

while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Seat Heaters*

179* Not available on all models

180

C o

n tro

ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 180

Climate Control System

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side control

buttons. 3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Floor and defroster vents

Floor ventsDashboard and floor vents

Dashboard vents

AUTO Button

Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons

(Recirculation) Button

/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C

o n

tro ls

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 181

Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.

To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

181

182

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

C o

n tro

ls

1Synchronized Mode

When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately.

The system adjusts each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun position updated by the navigation system.

Models with navigation system

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 182

Synchronized Mode

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronized mode.

1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using drivers side temperature control buttons.

Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C

o n

tro ls

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 183

Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.Sensor

Sensor

183

184

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 184

* Not available on all m

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 185

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System About Your Audio System................ 186 USB Port(s*) ..................................... 187 Auxiliary Input Jack* ........................ 188 Audio System Theft Protection* ....... 189 Audio Remote Controls.................... 190

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 192 Audio/Information Screen ................ 193 Display Setup ................................... 198 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 199 Playing a CD .................................... 201 Playing an iPod ................................ 204 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 207 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 210 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 213

Models with one display

odels

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 215 Audio/Information Screen ................ 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen...... 218 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 232 Display Setup ................................... 233 Voice Control Operation .................. 235 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 239 Playing SiriusXM Radio* ................. 244 Playing a CD .................................... 252 Playing an iPod ................................ 255 Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 258 Playing Pandora*............................ 262 Playing AhaTM................................... 264 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 265 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 268

Models with two displays

HondaLink ..................................... 270 Wi-Fi Connection............................. 275 Apple CarPlay .................................. 277 Android Auto .................................. 281 Siri Eyes Free .................................. 285

Audio Error Messages ...................... 286 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 291

Customized Features ................ 298, 316 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* ... 340 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink..... 343, 374 Compass* .......................................... 409

185

186

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 186

Audio System

1About Your Audio System

SiriusXM Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio, contact a dealer.

2 General Information on the Audio System P. 291

SiriusXM Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM Radio service*. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

Remote Controls

iPod

USB Flash Drive

Models with one display

Remote Controls

iPod

USB Flash Drive

Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s*) Featu

res

1USB Port(s*)

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.

We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port.

Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.

We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.

Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/1.5A of power. It does not output 1.0A/1.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 first.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

USB charge

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 187

USB Port(s*) 1. Open the cover. 2. Install the iPod USB connector or the USB

flash drive to the USB port.

u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive and connecting a cellular phone and charging device.

u The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.

In the console compartment*

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on the USB flash drive and connecting a cellular phone and charging device.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

In Center Pocket

Models with one display

Models with two displays

Models with one display

Models with two displays

In Console Compartment*

187* Not available on all models

188

uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack*

Featu res

1Auxiliary Input Jack*

You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX button.

Replacement of the audio system with other than a genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack inoperable.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 188

Auxiliary Input Jack*

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device to the

input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches

to the AUX mode.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection* Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 189

Audio System Theft Protection*

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display Enter code. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

189* Not available on all models

190

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Featu res

1Audio Remote Controls

Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some functions may not be operated.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 190

Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.

SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FMAMCDUSBiPod Bluetooth AudioPandora*AUX

FMAMSiriusXM*CDUSBiPod Pandora*Bluetooth AudioAudio Apps

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Buttons When listening to the radio

Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

Button

SOURCE Button

Button

(+ Button

(- Button

MENU Button*

Models with one display

Models with two displays

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu

res

1Audio Remote Controls

The MENU button is available only when the audio mode is FM, AM, SiriusXM*, CD, USB, iPod, Pandora*, or Bluetooth Audio.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 191

Steering Wheel MENU Button To choose options for the current audio device, press MENU, Audio Menu, and then SOURCE. Options available to you for each audio device: Radio: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Save Preset, Seek Up, or Seek

Down. HD RadioTM*: You can select Scan, Auto Select, Tag Song, Save Preset, Seek

Up, or Seek Down. SiriusXM*: You can select Scan, Tag Song, Save Preset, Channel Up,

Channel Down, Category Up, or Category Down. CD or USB flash drive: You can select Scan Folders, Scan Tracks, Repeat

Folder, Repeat Track, Random in Folder, or Random All Tracks. iPod: You can select Play/Pause, Repeat Song, Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle All

Songs. Bluetooth Audio: You can select Pause or Play. Pandora*: You can select Like, Dislike, Bookmark, or Play/Pause.

To choose options for the navigation system while it is in operation, press MENU, select Navi Menu, and then SOURCE.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

To choose options for HFL, press MENU, select Phone Menu, and then SOURCE. You can select Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial.

To choose options for the display setting, press MENU, select Display Setting, and then SOURCE. You can select Brightness, Contrast, or Black Level.

Models with two displays

191* Not available on all models

192

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 192

Audio System Basic Operation

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 200 2 Radio text P. 200 2 Music Search P. 202, 205, 211 2 Scan P. 200, 203, 212 2 Random/Repeat P. 203, 206, 212

This product includes software codes licensed under the conditions stated by the copyright holder. For license conditions and the copy of the corresponding source code, visit: http:// www.hondaopensource1.com/002

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.

Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to select any mode. The available mode includes Change Source, Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from Scan, Random/ Repeat, and so on. BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. Press once and make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models with one display

Button Selector Knob

MENU ButtonBACK Button

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

udio Trip Computer (Current Drive)

lock/Wallpaper Trip Computer (History of Trip A)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 193

Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

Switching the Display

(Display) Button A

C

Audio/Information Screen

193Continued

194

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 194

Audio Shows the current audio information.

Trip computer (Current Drive) Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

Trip computer (History of Trip A) Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles. Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

1Wallpaper Setup

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.

Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 195

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

2. Press the SETTINGS button. 3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,

Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.

4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper, then press . u The preview of the imported data is

displayed. 5. Rotate to select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen. 6. Press to save the data. u The confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.

Wallpaper Setup

Continued 195* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

196

Featu res

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 196

Select wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Rotate to select Set, then press .

Delete wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then

Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.

5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Featu

res

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 197

Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press . 3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following choices:

Selector Knob

SETTINGS Button

Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SVC

197

198

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Featu res

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 198

Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select Display.

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press .

4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press .

1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other.

3. Rotate to select Background Color, then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .

Changing the Screen Brightness

Changing the Screens Color Theme

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

resSeek/Skip Buttons Press and to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 199

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

FM/AM Button Press to select a band.

Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: Tune to the selected station. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

199Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

200

Featu res

1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190 You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU button and selecting Change Source on the MENU screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 200

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .

Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.

Radio Data System (RDS)

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu

res

Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 201

Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

CD Button Press to play a CD.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

201Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

202

Featu res

1Playing a CD

NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 202

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .

How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)

File Selection

Folder Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 203

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

How to Select a Play Mode

Random/Repeat is selected.

203

204

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Featu res

Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 204

Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX button.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button Press to select iPod (if connected).

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

Album Art

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

1Playing an iPod

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 205

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press . 3. Rotate to select a menu. 4. Press to display the items on that menu. 5. Rotate to select an item, then press .

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Continued 205

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

206

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Song: Repeats the current file. Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 206

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

How to Select a Play Mode

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu

res

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora is free personalized radio that offers effortless and endless music and comedy. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, genres, composers, or comedians and it will do the rest.

If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.

Changing Stations To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 207

Playing Internet Radio Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth.

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

iPhone

Continued 207

208

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 208

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button Press to select Pandora.

Skip Button Press to skip a song.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob Turn to switch to another station.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.

USB Indicator Appears when a phone is connected.

Rating Icon

Preset Button (1) Press to switch the mode between pause and resume.

Preset Button (2) Press to select Dislike.

Preset Button (3) Press to select Like.

Preset Button (4) Press to select Bookmark Track.

Preset Button (5) Press to select Bookmark Artist.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu

res

1Pandora Menu

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 Pandora P. 288

Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 209

You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Like (Thumbs-up) Dislike (Thumbs-down) Station List Change Source Bookmark Track Bookmark Artist Play/Pause

Operating a menu item 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select an item, then press .

Pandora Menu

209

210

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Featu res

Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

Selector Knob Turn to change folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 210

Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 291

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 211

1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .

How to Select a File from the Music Search List

File Selection

Folder Selection

Continued 211

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

212

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 212

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

How to Select a Play Mode

Random/Repeat is selected.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1Playing Bluetooth Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 213

Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 350

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.

AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth Audio.

Skip Buttons Press or to change files.

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/ Information Screen

Preset Button (1) Press to resume playing a file.

Preset Button (2) Press to pause a playing file.

213Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

214

Featu res

1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some phones.

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack, you may need to press the AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 214

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.

2. Press the AUX button.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 215

Audio System Basic Operation

Featu

res

1Audio System Basic Operation

Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 240, 242 2 Music Search P. 253, 256, 266, 269 2 Scan P. 241, 251, 254, 267 2 Play Mode P. 254, 257, 267

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.

: Select to go to the home screen. 2 Switching the Display P. 218

: Select to display any mode. The available modes include Sound, View Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.

: Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed.

Button: Press to change the audio/ information touch screen brightness. Press once and select (- or (+ to make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode

switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models with two displays

Button (HOME) Icon

(MENU) Icon (BACK) Icon

215

216

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Featu res

Audio

Clock

Wallpaper

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 216

Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status, trip computer, compass*, Turn by Turn, and clock/ wallpaper.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

Switching the Display

(Display) Button

Compass*/Trip Computer/Audio

Turn by Turn/Trip Computer/Audio

Audio/Information Screen

Trip Computer/ Audio

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 217

Turn by Turn Displays the Turn by Turn screen.

Trip computer Displays the range and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

Audio Displays the current audio information.

Clock/Wallpaper Displays a clock screen.

217

218

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

Featu res

1Audio/Information Touch Screen

Touchscreen operation Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping

and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction. You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands. Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 218

Audio/Information Touch Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Select to go to the home screen. Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Aha, Smartphone connection, or App List.

Phone Displays the HFL information.

2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 374

Switching the Display

Home Screen

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 219

Info Displays Trip Computer. To see all available information, Trip Computer, Voice Info, or System/Device Information, select on the Info Menu screen.

Trip Computer: Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The

information is stored every time you reset Trip A. To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.

Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.

System/Device Information: System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system. USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.

Audio Displays the current audio information.

Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 316

Navigation*

Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

219Continued* Not available on all models

220

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 220

HondaLink Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and social media streams.

2 HondaLink P. 270

Aha Displays the AhaTM screen.

2 Playing AhaTM P. 264

Smartphone connection Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

2 Apple CarPlay P. 277 2 Android Auto P. 281

App List Adds or removes App or Widget on the home screen.

2 Home Screen P. 224

*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 221

1. Select . 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be. 4. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout

221Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

222

Featu res

1Wallpaper Setup

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 256 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 5 MB. The maximum image size is 4,096 4,096 pixels. If

the image size is less than 800 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.

If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 222

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information touch screen.

Import wallpaper You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open

the Wallpaper tab. 5. Select Add New. u The picture name is displayed on the list.

6. Select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen. 7. Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper

list.

Wallpaper Setup

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select .

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.

Audio/information touch screen

Audio/information screen

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 223

Select wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select Set. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To view wallpaper once it is set Press the (display) button to change the audio/information screen until the wallpaper is displayed.

2 Switching the Display P. 216

Delete wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select Delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

6. Select Yes to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

Continued 223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

224

Featu res

1Home Screen

The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 224

To change to a next screen

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Home Screen

Swipe

Icon Icon Current page position

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

1To use apps or widgets

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that apps or widgets shortcut on the home screen.

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339

In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup.

Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicles information and your privacy.

You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Information. 6. Select an App that you want to delete. 7. Select Delete.

Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 225

To use apps or widgets 1. Select . 2. Select . 3. Select App List. u The APPS screen appears.

4. Select the app or widget you want to use.

Preinstall app list: Browser: Displays the web browser utilized

by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. Calculator: Displays Calculator. Downloads: Displays the data downloaded

from the web browser and so on. Install USB: Check with a Honda dealer for

apps that are available for installation. Search: Displays various retrieval screens. Settings: Displays the Android setting

screen. App List

Continued 225

226

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 226

To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.

1. Select . 2. Select . 3. Select and hold empty space on the home

screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select Add App or Add Widget. u The APPS screen appears.

Select and hold.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 227

5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be. 7. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

227Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

228

Featu res

1To move icons on the home screen

You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, aha, Smartphone connection, and App LIst icons in the same manner.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 228

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

1To remove icons on the home screen

You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, aha, Smartphone connection, and App List icons.

Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 229

To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization

screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove

to the trash icon. u The icon is removed from the home

screen. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop to trash icon.

Continued 229* Not available on all models

230

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 230

1. Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears.

2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or swipe up the icon to close

the area.

Status Area

Swipe

Status Area Icon

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Touch Screen Featu

res

1Closing Apps

If you leave the apps used open in the background, some apps may stop operating properly next time using them. If this happens close unused apps.

To close all apps on the system, select Stop All, then Yes.

You cannot close the HondaLink, AhaTM and Garmin* apps.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 231

You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. 1. Select and hold . 2. Select an app you want to close. 3. Select Stop. u The display will return to the app list.

Closing Apps

231* Not available on all models

232

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Featu res

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select Sound.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 232

Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select Audio. 3. Select . 4. Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices: BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, Subwoofer*, Speed Volume Compensation (SVC).

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu

res

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 233

Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information touch screen.

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Display Settings. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK.

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Background Color. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK.

Changing the Screen Brightness

Changing the Screens Color Theme

233Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

234

Featu res

1Selecting an Audio Source

If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the upper portion of the screen. These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen. You can startup those audio apps from .

When you are using the AhaTM screen and you want to select another source, select SOURCE on the upper left of the screen. The source select screen will appear. Select the source you want.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 234

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Selecting an Audio Source

Limitations for Manual Operation

Select the source icon. Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu

res

1Voice Control Operation

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 235

Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are

using. Close the windows and moonroof*. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your

command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

Voice Recognition

235Continued* Not available on all models

236

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 236

When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Voice Help after the beep or select Voice Help.

You can also see the list of commands by selecting Info, , and Voice Info.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

*1: Models with navigation system

Voice Portal Screen

* Not available on all models

Phone Call This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for the phone commands. Dial by number Call history Redial Call Call Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Music Search*1

This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.

Audio*1

When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen. Audio On Audio Off Radio FM Radio AM Radio SXM DISC Pandora*

iPod USB Other Sources Pandora* cannot be used with Android Auto.

Navigation*1

The screen changes to the navigation voice recognition screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Voice Settings The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab on the System settings screen.

Trip Computer The screen changes to the trip computer screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 237

Voice Help You can see a list of the available commands on the screen. Useful Commands Phone Commands Audio Commands On Screen Commands Music Search Commands General Commands Climate Control Commands All Commands Voice Settings Getting Started

The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen. Call Call What time is it? What is todays date?

*1: Models with navigation system

Useful Commands

* Not available on all models

The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. Call by Number Call by Name Call Call

The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

Radio FM Commands Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>

FM Radio FM preset <1-12>

Radio AM Commands Radio tune to <530-1710> AM Radio AM preset <1-6>

Radio SXM Commands SXM channel <1-999> SXM channel Radio SXM preset <1-12>

Phone Commands

Audio Commands*1

DISC Commands DISC play DISC play track <1-30>

Pandora Commands*

Pandora play

iPod Commands iPod play iPod play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to?

USB Commands USB play USB play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to?

Bluetooth audio Commands Bluetooth audio play NOTE: Bluetooth Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth Audio devices.

237Continued

238

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 238

When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.

The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.

Using Song By Voice Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: Music search.

Song By Voice Commands What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? Whats playing? Whos playing? What album is this?

*1: Models with navigation system

On Screen Commands

Music Search Commands*1

Play Commands Play artist Play track/song Play album Play genre/category Play playlist Play composer

List Commands List artist List album List genre/category List playlist List composer

What time is it? What is todays date?

General Commands

Climate Control on Climate Control off Fan Speed <1-7> Temperature max heat Temperature max cool Temperature <57-87> degrees Defrost on Defrost off Air conditioner on Air conditioner off More Climate control automatic Vent Dash and floor Fan speed up Fan speed down Floor vents Floor and defrost Temperature up Temperature down

Climate Control Commands*1

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

TAG Icon Select to tag the song if it is played on an HD RadioTM station. The iPod/ iPhone should be connected to the audio system to store the tagged song information on your device.

Models with HD RadioTM

Audio/Information Touch Screen

et Icons e the radio frequency for preset memory. ct and hold the preset icon to store that ion. Select to display preset 7 onwards.

Audio/Information Screen

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 239

Playing AM/FM Radio

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Tune Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency.

Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal.

Pres Tun Sele stat

239Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

240

Featu res

1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.

If the audio system has the memory capacity, the tagged song information can be stored in it.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Models with HD RadioTM

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 240

To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.

Preset Memory

Station List

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 241

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

If your iPod/iPhone is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information. If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in the audio system temporarily, then once the device is connected to the system, data is transferred to the iPod/iPhone. To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone or the audio system, select TAG.

Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system. 1. Select . 2. Select Song Tag List.

Scan

Tag Song to Device

Tagged Song List

Models with HD RadioTM

Models with HD RadioTM

241Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

242

Featu res

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 242

Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select . 2. Select HD Radio Subchannel. 3. Select the channel number.

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh.

HD Subchannel

Radio Data System (RDS)

Models with HD RadioTM

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 243

Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select . 2. Select View Radio Text.

Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

To turn off scan, select Cancel or .

243

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

Featu res

Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

TAG Icon Select to tag a song played at a SiriusXM Radio channel. The iPod/ iPhone should be connected to the audio system to store the tagged song information on your device.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards.

change .Select and

ithin the

Audio/Information Screen

Station Art

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 244

Playing SiriusXM Radio*

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM Radio category.

Scan Icon Select to scan each channel.

Skip Icons Select or to section in the channel hold to move rapidly w section.

Album Art

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Playing SiriusXM Radio*

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen.

2 Audio Remote Controls P. 190

Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio settings screen.

2 Customized Features P. 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 245

1. Select . 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.

To Change the Tune Mode

Continued 245* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

246

Featu res

1Playing SiriusXM Radio*

You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 246

To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store. 3. Select Replace.

You can also store a channel by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.

1. Tune a station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel. u A message appears if there are no

available presets. 5. Select Combine.

Preset Memory

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Listening to Featured Channels

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 247

Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM can be displayed and selected. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list. 2. Select the Channel List tab. 3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.

4. Select the channel.

Listening to Featured Channels

Continued 247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

248

Featu res

1Replay Function

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0 *1 as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information touch screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

(C)

(B)

(A)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 248

The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. 1. Select . 2. Select Playback Position. 3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay.

To play or pause on playback mode: 1. Select . 2. Select Play/Pause.

Returning to real-time broadcast 1. Select . 2. Select Play Live Broadcast.

Replay Function

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Live Sports Alert

The sports alert function at SiriusXM mode only.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM mode is on. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

2 Customized Features P. 316

You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 249

While listening to SiriusXM Radio, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup (Favorite Team). 6. Select a team.

To set up an alert message 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt). 6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).

Live Sports Alert

Continued 249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*

250

Featu res

1To set up an alert beep

You can also set up an alert beep by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.

1Traffic and Weather Information

The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM mode only.

You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Setting. 4. Select the SXM tab.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 250

To set up an alert beep 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep). 6. Select On.

Traffic and Weather Information You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 6. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unset.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu

res

1Scan

The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.

The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 251

Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan. 2. Select Scan Channels. u To only scan preset stations, select Scan Songs in Presets.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

If your iPhone/iPod is connected to the USB port, you can store the TAG information. If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in the audio system temporarily. Once the device is connected to the system, data is transferred to the iPod/iPhone. To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone, or the audio system, select TAG.

Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system. 1. Select . 2. Select Tagged Song List.

Scan

Tag Song to Device

Tagged Song List

251

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Featu res

Track Icons Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Open/Close Icon*2

Displays/hides the detailed information.

(Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 252

Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu

res

1Playing a CD

NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 253

1. Select and select Music Search.

2. Select a folder.

3. Select a track.

How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/ AAC)

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Continued 253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

254

Featu res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 254

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode.

Random/Repeat Select a play mode.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

Song Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 255

Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Cover Art

Play/Pause Icon

255Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

256

Featu res

1Playing an iPod

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information touch screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source is unavailable and audio files on the phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 256

1. Select and select Music Search.

2. Select the items on that menu.

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Category Selection

Item Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 257

You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Select a play mode.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

257

258

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Featu res

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

Setting options: On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands

are available. Off: Disable the feature.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 258

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.

To enable SBV 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice. 6. Select On or Off.

Models with navigation system

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu

res

1Searching for music using SBV

Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By Voice Commands P. 238

NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

2 Phonetic Modification P. 260

SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay. Use Siri Eyes Free instead.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 259

Searching for music using SBV 1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. 2. Press the (Talk) button and say Music

Search to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod.

3. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say (List) Artist A to view a

list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.

u Example 2: Say Play Artist A to start playing songs by that artist.

4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say Music Search again to re-activate this mode.

Continued 259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

260

Featu res

1Phonetic Modification

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 260

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic

Modification. 6. Select New Modification. 7. Select USB or iPod.

Phonetic Modification

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 261

8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on

the screen. 9. Select an entry to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u The listen to the current phonetic

modification, select Play. u To delete the current phonetic

modification, select Delete. 10.Select Modify. 11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to

use (e.g., Artist A) when prompted. 12.Select OK. u The artist No Name is phonetically

modified to Artist A. When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command Play Artist A to play songs by the artist No Name.

261

262

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora*

Featu res

1Playing Pandora*

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy youll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.

If your phone is connected to Android Auto, Pandora is only available through the Android Auto interface. Visit the Android Auto website to check compatibility.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 262

Playing Pandora*

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

2 Phone Setup P. 383 2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

U.S. models

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Cover Art

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a song.

Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station.

Skip Icon Select to skip a song.

Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a song.

Audio/Information Screen

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora* Featu

res

1Pandora Menu

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.

2 Pandora P. 288

Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 263

You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Bookmark Station List New Station Sound Setting

Operating a menu item 1. Select . 2. Select an item.

Pandora Menu

263

264

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AhaTM

Featu res

1Playing AhaTM

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that organizes your favorite web content into live radio stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio, location-based services, and audio updates from social media sites.

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

The menu items vary depending on the station you selected.

You must have a previously set up AhaTM account prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit www.aharadio.com for more information.

You want to select another source, select AUDIO on the upper left of the screen. The source select screen will appear. Select the source you want.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, AhaTM can only be accessed when the phone is connected through Wi-Fi.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 264

Playing AhaTM

AhaTM can be displayed and operated on the audio/information touch screen when your smartphone is connected to the audio system by Wi-Fi or through Bluetooth with the HondaLink app downloaded to your smartphone.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275 2 HondaLink P. 270

Audio/Information Touch Screen

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Audio/Information Screen

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Open/Close Icon*2

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 265

Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

265Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

266

Featu res

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System

P. 291

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information touch screen.

2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 287

Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu screen to switch to another USB device.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 266

1. Select and select Music Search. 2. Select Music.

3. Select a folder.

4. Select a track.

How to Select a File from the Music Search List

Folder Selection

Track Selection

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu

res

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

Random/Repeat Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 267

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Scan 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a play mode.

Random/Repeat Select a play mode.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

How to Select a Play Mode

267

268

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio

Featu res

1Playing Bluetooth Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. To check if your phone is compatible, visit http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

The connected phone for Bluetooth Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth Device List.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 268

Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Audio/Information Touch Screen

VOL (Volume) Icons Select to adjust the volume.

Group Icons Select or to change group.Pause Icon

Play Icon

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Track Icons Select or to change tracks.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Audio/Information Screen

(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.

(MENU) Icon Select to display the menu items.

(BACK) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu

res

1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth settings on the Audio menu screen by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings.

1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 269

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon.

1. Select . 2. Select Music Search. 3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 4. Select an item. u The selection begins playing.

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Searching for Music

269

270

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

1HondaLink

The HondaLink connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 270

HondaLink HondaLink connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 275 2 Phone Setup P. 383

Places*

Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation.

Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.

HondaLink Menu

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 271

Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Weather Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.

Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink service.

To enable to the HondaLink service 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select the HondaLink tab. 5. Select Diagnostic & Location Data. 6. Select On.

You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink service.

Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink Service

271Continued

272

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 272

To link with HondaLink You can see the Connection Guide screen after launching HondaLink. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 273

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A message appears and notifies you of a

new message on the header area. u When the message is received, a

notification ring can be heard.

2. A message icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

Message Icon (yellow)

273Continued

274

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 274

3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection Featu

res

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on Wi-Fi Network List. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 275

Wi-Fi Connection You can connect the display audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information touch screen. If your phone has cell hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. 5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. 6. Select Wi-Fi Network List. u Make sure your phones Wi-Fi setting is

in access point (tethering) mode. u Select the phone you want to connect to

the system. u If you do not find the phone you want to

connect in the list, select Scan. 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for your phone, and

select OK. u When the connection is successful, the

icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen.

Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

275Continued

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

276

Featu res

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)

You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi- Fi connection again after you boot your phone.

iPhone users

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 276

Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Apple CarPlay

Only iPhone5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay operation.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 279

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 277

Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via USB, you can use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

277Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

278

Featu res

1Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 278

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps Display Apple CarPlay map and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay map) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Apple CarPlay Menu

Home Screen Apple CarPlay Menu

Go back to the home screen.

Apple CarPlay Icon Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen.

Models with navigation system

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu

res

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple CarPlay

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 279

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlay Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt

shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt

does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Continued 279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

280

Featu res

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri Eyes Free: What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 280

Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri Eyes Free.

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free

(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri Eyes Free. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu

res

1Android Auto

To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the front USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android Auto operation.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187

To directly access the Android Auto phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Android Auto, calls are only made through Android Auto. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink, turn Android Auto OFF or detach the USB cable from your Android phone.

2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 281

Android Auto When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

2 USB Port(s*) P. 187 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 283

281Continued* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

282

Featu res

1Android Auto

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination.

Models with navigation system

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 282

a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed. d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home screen f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice.

Android Auto Menu

: Go back to the home screen.

Android Auto Icon

6

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu

res

1Enabling Android Auto

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android Auto

Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by Googles Privacy Policy.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 283

When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android Auto Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt

shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt

does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

Auto Pairing Connection

Continued 283

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

284

Featu res

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 284

Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate voice recognition.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free Featu

res

1Siri Eyes Free

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 285

Siri Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

Using Siri Eyes Free

(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.

(Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free

285

286

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 286

Audio Error Messages

Solution

will be skipped. The next supported track/file lly.

t) button and remove the disc, and check that the cleared. isc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

CDs P. 293

age reappears, press the button, and pull out

disc. lays, there is a problem with the first disc. age repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, . ce the disc out of the player.

isc is not damaged or deformed. CDs P. 293

ystem off and allow the player to cool down until e is cleared.

CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays

Error Message Cause

Unplayable File Track/file format not supported Current track/file

plays automatica

Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual Push Eject*1

Bad Disc Please check Owners Manual Please push eject button*2

Mechanical error

Press the (ejec error message is

Check that the d disc again.

2 Protecting If the error mess

the disc. Insert a different

If the new disc p If the error mess

contact a dealer Do not try to for

Mecha Error

Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual

Servo error

Check Disc Disc error Check that the d

2 Protecting

Heat Error High temperature Turn the audio s

the error messag

uuAudio Error Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive Featu

res

ion

er unit. Check if the device is compatible with the

isconnect the device. Then turn the audio system e that caused the error.

it appears when a supported iPod is connected,

e iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

M or an unsupported format. This error message g.

are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash

.

it appears when a supported device is connected,

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 287

iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays

Error Message Solut

USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapt USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual*1

The connected USB device has a problem. See Owners Manual*2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. D off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the devic

Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge th

Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DR appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next son

No Data

Appears when the iPod is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there drive.

Check that compatible files are stored on the device

Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If reconnect the device.

iPod

USB flash drive

iPod and USB flash drive

287

288

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora

Featu res

Solution

e is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the . Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

list on the device. Use the device to create a

ng or select Dislike over the predetermined

peration is failed. Try again later.

with Pandora activated. Reboot the app and

s not supported. Update Pandora to the latest

r is in maintenance. Try again later.

to play music. Check your device.

s failed 10 times. Try again later. nsferring data is unstable. Try again later.

not available in the current area.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 288

Pandora If an error occurs while playing Pandora, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual

Appears when an incompatible devic audio system off, and turn it on again

There is no station list in the device. Please add the station list to your device.

Appears when there is no station station.

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may skip each hour.

Appears when you try to skip a so number of times in an hour.

Unable to save rating. Unable to save bookmark or Unable to skip

Appears when the commanded o

No data Appears when no data is available reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when Pandora version i version.

PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora serve

Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your mobile phone Appears when Pandora is unable

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

Appears when data transfer ha Appears when condition for tra

Unable to play PANDORA. Music Licensing restricts play in this area. Appears when Pandora service is

U.S. models

Models with one display

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 289

Error Message Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again. Skip limit reached.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please try again later. Unable to create bookmark. Please try again later.

Appears when the commanded operation has failed. Try again later.

No Data Appears when no data is available with Pandora activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

Pandora App version is not supported Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Update Pandora to the latest version.

Unable to complete the operation. Please try again later.

Appears when the Pandora server is in maintenance. Try again later.

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone

Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone

Appears when Pandora app is not installed on your device. Install Pandora app to the your device.

Models with two displays

289

290

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Featu res

on

n to close the app.

little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep e error message continues, perform Factory Data

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 290

Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

Error Message*1 Soluti

Unfortunately, **** has stopped.

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the scree

**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?

App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If th Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339

Models with two displays

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 291

General Information on the Audio System

Featu

res

1Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: US: SiriusXM Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-

800-852-9696 Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or

1-877-209-0079

1Receiving SiriusXM Radio

The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle. In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack

SiriusXM Radio Service*

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel 0.

2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.

Switch to the SiriusXM mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Channel Not Subscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Antenna Disconnected: The SiriusXM antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio

Receiving SiriusXM Radio

SiriusXM Radio Display Messages

291* Not available on all models

292

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

Featu res

1Recommended CDs

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 292

Recommended CDs Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs Featu

res

1Protecting CDs

NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples:

Damaged CDs

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

With Label/ Sticker

Using Printer Label Kit

Sealed With Plastic Ring Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/ Cracked

Warped Burrs

Small CDs

3-inch (8-cm) CD

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 293

Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

293

294

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Featu res

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 294

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Model iPod (5th generation)

iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012*1

iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2010*2

iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012*1

iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*2

iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5*1

iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s*2

USB Flash Drives

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 295

Models with two displays

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Featu res

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

295Continued

296

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 296

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (THE APPLICATIONS) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDAS TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 297

About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System, then open the Others tab. 4. Select Detail Information. 5. Select About device. 6. Select Legal information. 7. Select Open source licenses.

Models with two displays

297

298

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 298

Customized Features

1Customized Features

When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

Shift to (P.

Set the parking brake.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

1How to customize

To customize other features, rotate , and press . 2 List of customizable options P. 304

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models with one display

SETTINGS Button

Audio/Information Screen

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 299

Customization flow

Clock Format

Background Color Header Clock Display

Factory Data Reset

Clock Adjustment

Press the SETTINGS button.

Language

Default

Edit Pairing Code

Bluetooth On/Off Bluetooth Device List

Voice Prompt

Brightness Contrast

Black Level Beep

Clock/ Wallpaper

Type

Clock Type Wallpaper

System Settings

Voice Recog

Bluetooth

Display

Clock

Others

299Continued

300

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Trip B Reset Timing

Adjust Outside Temp. Display Trip A Reset Timing

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Memory Position Link

Keyless Start Guidance Screens*

n

tup*

Remote Start System ON/OFF*

ACC Display Speed Unit*

Forward Collision Warning Distance*

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*

Road Departure Mitigation Setting*

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 300

Vehicle Settings

Meter Setup

TPMS Calibratio

Driving Position Se

Driver Assist

System Setup*

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Keyless Access Light Flash

Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock

Door Unlock Mode

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer

Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer Maintenance Reseto.

Keyless Access Beep

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 301

Default

Keyless Access Setup*

Lighting Setup

Door Setup

Maintenance Inf

301Continued* Not available on all models

302

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Wallpaper

Source Select Popup

Clock Type

Sound

Cover Art*1

Connect Audio*1

Bluetooth Device List*1

Clock Adjustment Clock Format

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 302

Default

Default

Audio Settings

Clock/ Wallpaper

Type Info

Settings

*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Add Bluetooth Device Disconnect

Edit Speed Dial Auto Transfer Auto Answer

Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync

Enable Text Message

Message Auto Reading

New Text Message Alert

Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 303

Default

Phone Settings

Connect Phone

Text Messages

Bluetooth Device

List

Phone

Default

Camera Settings

Rear Camera

303Continued

304

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 304

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Settings

Display

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.

Beep Selects whether a beeper sounds when you operate the selector knob.

On*1/Off

Blue- tooth

Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth on and off. On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a paired phone, and create a security PIN.

2 Phone Setup P. 350

Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 352

Random/Fixed*1

Voice Recog

Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner*1/Expert

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 305

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Settings

Clock

Clock/ Wallpaper Type

Clock Type Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/ Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 195

Blank/Galaxy*1/ Metallic/Add New

Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock. 2 Clock P. 116

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

Others

Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/ Spanish

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Green

Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off

Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 315

Yes/No

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System Settings group as default.

Yes/No

305Continued

306

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 306

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Settings

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver Assist System Setup*

Forward Collision Warning Distance* Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.

On/Off*1

ACC Display Speed Unit* Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- information display.

mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1

(Canada)

Road Departure Mitigation Setting*

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 307

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Settings

Meter Setup

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1

Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance Screens*

Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Remote Start System ON/ OFF* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off

Driving Position Setup*

Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat position to a stored setting.

On*1/Off

307Continued* Not available on all models

308

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 308

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Settings

Keyless Access Setup*

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either door handle.

On*1/Off

Lighting Setup

Interior Light Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

60seconds/ 30seconds*1/ 15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

60seconds/ 30seconds/ 15seconds*1/ 0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 309

*1:Default Setting *2:Automatic transmission/CVT models

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Settings

Door Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.

With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift from P*2/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.

All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted to Park*2/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/ 60seconds/ 30seconds*1

Mainte- nance Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle Settings group as default.

Yes/No

309Continued

310

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 310

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio Settings

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 197

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass, Treble and SUBW*), -9 ~ C*1 ~ +9 (Fader and Balance), Off/Low/ Mid*1/High (SVC)

Source Select Popup Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources comes on when the AUDIO button is pressed.

On/Off*1

Cover Art Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off

Connect Audio Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth Audio device to HFL.

Bluetooth Device List Edits or deletes a Bluetooth Audio device paired to HFL.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio Settings group as default.

Yes/No

iPod, USB, or Pandora* mode

Bluetooth Audio or Pandora* mode

Bluetooth Audio or Pandora* mode

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 311

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Info Settings

Clock/ Wall- paper type

Clock Type

See System Settings on P. 304 to P. 305 Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info Settings group as default.

Yes/No

311Continued

312

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 312

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone Settings

Connect Phone Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 350

Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

2 Phone Setup P. 350

Phone

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. 2 Speed Dial P. 361

Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 313

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone Settings

Text Messages

Enable Text Message Turns the text message function on and off. On*1/Off

New Text Message Alert Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text message.

On/Off*1

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text message. On- A text message is always read aloud. Off- A text message is not read aloud. Auto- A text message is read aloud only when

driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Yes/No

313Continued

314

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 314

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera Settings

Rear Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Camera Settings group as default.

Yes/No

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu

res

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

The following settings will be reset: Audio preset settings Phonebook entries Other display and each item settings.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 315

Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other,

then Factory Data Reset. u The confirmation message will appear.

3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to reset the settings.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press again to reset the settings. u The confirmation message will appear.

Press to select OK.

315

316

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 316

Customized Features

1Customized Features

When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

Shift to (P.

Set the parking brake.

To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 325

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

Use the audio/information touch screen to customize certain features.

How to customize With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, select Settings, then select a setting item.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Models with two displays

Audio/Information Touch Screen

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 317

Customization flow

Select Settings.

Brightness Contrast

Black Level

Sound/Beep

System

Display Display Settings

Background Color

Guidance Volume Text Message Volume

Select .

Voice Recog Voice Prompt

Blue Amber

Red Violet

Voice Recog. Volume

Beep Volume

Voice Recog. Volume

Song by Voice*

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification*

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Automatic Phone Sync

One Press Voice Operation

Verbal Reminder*

Blue Green

317Continued* Not available on all models

318

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res Language

k/Wallpaper Type

ock Adjustment*

Clock

Wallpaper

nual Time Zone*

Auto Daylight Clock Display

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Clock Format uto Time Zone*

Detail Information Factory Data Reset

Clock Reset

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 318

Default

System

Others

Cloc

Cl

Clock

Ma A

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

rward Collision Warning Distance*

CC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*

ad Departure Mitigation Setting*

ne Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*

Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp Display

Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Keyless Start Guidance Screens*

Memory Position Link

ACC Display Speed Unit*

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 319

Vehicle

Driver Assist System Setup* Fo

A

Ro

La

Meter Setup

Driving Position Setup*

TPMS Calibration

319Continued* Not available on all models

320

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock

ey and Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Maintenance Reset

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity

Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash

Keyless Access Beep emote Start System On/Off*

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 320

Door Setup

K

Maintenance Info

Default

Lighting Setup

Keyless Access Setup*

R

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Sound Audio Source Pop-Up

Cover Art

HD Radio Mode*

RDS INFO Tune Start

ortsFlash Setup(Interrupt)

tsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)

tsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)

Traffic & Weather Setup

Bluetooth Device List

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 321

Audio Common

FM/AM

SXM*

Sp

Spor

Spor

Default

321Continued* Not available on all models

322

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

allpaper Type Clock

WallpaperAdjustment*

ck Format Time Zone*

l Time Zone*

o Daylight

ck Display ock Reset

een Preference

c & Location Data

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 322

Clock/W Clock

Clo Auto

Manua

Aut

Clo Cl

Other Info Scr

Default

Clock/Info

HondaLink Diagnosti

Clock

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

Bluetooth Device List Edit Speed Dial

Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync

HondaLink Assist Enable Text/Email

Select Account

ew Message Notification

Show with Turn Signal ay Time after Turn Signal Off

Reference Line Default

Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

Default

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 323

Default

Phone Phone

Text/Email

N

Camera

LaneWatch*

Displ

Rear Camera

323Continued* Not available on all models

324

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List

Edit Pairing Code

Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Network List

Wi-Fi Information

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 324

Default

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

Smartphone Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 325

List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Display

Display Settings

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information touch screen.

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information touch screen.

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information touch screen.

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information touch screen.

Blue Green/Blue*1/ Amber/Red/Violet

Sound/ Beep

Guidance Volume Changes the sound volume. Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system.

1~6*1~11

Text Message Volume Changes the text/e-mail message reading volume. 1~6*1~11

Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11

Verbal Reminder* Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off

Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2*1/3

325Continued* Not available on all models

326

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 326

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Voice Recog

Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 1~6*1~11

Song by Voice* Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. On*1/Off

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification*

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or an iPod/iPhone.

2 Phonetic Modification P. 260

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 392

Automatic Phone Sync Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On/Off

One Press Voice Operation Changes the setting of the touch screen operation when using the voice operation.

On/Off*1

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 327

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System Clock

Clock/ Wallpaper Type

Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital/ Small Digital*1/Off

Wallpaper Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Galaxy*1/Metallic/ Blank

Clock Adjustment* Adjusts clock.

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

Auto Time Zone* Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through different time zones.

On*1/Off

Manual Time Zone* Changes the time zone manually.

Auto Daylight Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this function.

On*1/Off

Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off

Clock Reset Resets the clock settings to the factory default. Yes/No

327Continued* Not available on all models

328

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 328

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Others

Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/ Spanish

Touch Panel Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1

Detail Information Displays the Android setting items.

Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 339

Yes/No

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System settings group as default.

Yes/No

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 329

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Settings

TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver Assist System Setup*

Forward Collision Warning Distance* Changes distance the CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/ Short

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep*

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.

On/Off*1

ACC Display Speed Unit* Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- information display.

mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1

(Canada)

Road Departure Mitigation Setting*

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep*

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

329Continued* Not available on all models

330

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 330

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle Meter Setup

Language Selection Changes the displayed language on the multi- information display.

English*1/French/ Spanish

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)

Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1

Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance Screens*

Displays the push button start guidance when conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 331

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Driving Position Setup*

Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off. On*1/Off

Keyless Access Setup*

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Remote Start System On/ Off* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. On*1/Off

Lighting Setup

Interior Light Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.

60 sec/30 sec*1/ 15 sec

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

60 sec/30 sec/ 15 sec*1/0 sec

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min

331Continued* Not available on all models

332

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 332

*1:Default Setting *2:Automatic transmission/CVT models

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Door Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P*2/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.

All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shift to P*2/ All Doors with IGN Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Sets up either the drivers door or both doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key.

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening either door.

90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*1

Mainte- nance Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle group as default.

Yes/No

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 333

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group

Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Common

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 232

-6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS and TREBLE), RR9~0*1 ~FR9 (FADER), L9~*1 0~R9 (BALANCE), -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (Subwoofer)*, Off/Low/Mid*1/ High (Speed Volume Compensation)

Audio Source Pop- Up

Selects whether the list of selectable audio source comes on when Audio is selected on the home screen.

On/Off*1

[Your selected media] Cover Art

Turns the cover art display on and off. On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

FM/AM

HD Radio Mode* Selects whether the audio system automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analogue waves only.

Auto*1/Analog

RDS INFO Turns on and off the RDS information. On*1/Off

iPod or USB mode

FM/AM mode

333Continued* Not available on all models

334

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 334

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio SXM*

Tune Start Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as you change preset stations.

On*1/Off

SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt)

Turns on and off the sports alert function. Off*1/ On(one time)/ On(continue)

SportsFlash Setup(Interrupt Beep)

Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is notified.

On*1/Off

SportsFlash Setup(Favorite Team)

Selects your favorite sports teams. 2 Live Sports Alert P. 249

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the information.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio settings group as default.

Yes/No

SiriusXM mode

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 335

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Clock/ Info

Clock

Clock/ Wallpaper Type

Clock

See System on P. 325

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment*

Clock Format

Auto Time Zone*

Manual Time Zone*

Auto Daylight

Clock Display

Clock Reset

HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data

Turns HondaLink on and off. On/Off

Other Info Screen Preference

Changes the information screen type. Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/Info settings group as default.

Yes/No

335Continued* Not available on all models

336

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 336

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. 2 Speed Dial P. 389

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off*1

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On*1/Off

Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account.

New Message Notification

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail messages.

On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.

Yes/No

uuCustomized Featuresu Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 337

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera

Rear Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496 On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 496 On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera setting group as default.

Yes/No

LaneWatch*

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn.

On*1/Off

Display Time after Turn Signal Off

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the center.

0 second*1/ 2 seconds

Reference Line Selects whether the reference lines come on the LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

337Continued* Not available on all models

338

uuCustomized Featuresu

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 338

*1:Default Setting

Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Bluetooth/ Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Selects to change the Bluetooth status. On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 383

Edit Pairing Code Edits a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 384

Random/Fixed*1

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi On/Off Status Changes the Wi-Fi mode. On/Off*1

Wi-Fi Network List Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi device.

Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the device.

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.

Yes/No

Smartphone Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Sets up the Apple CarPlay/Android Auto connection.

Enable Once/ Always Enable/ Cancel

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu

res

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use HondaLink because it becomes inactive and you will have to reconnect.

2 HondaLink P. 270

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 339

Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. 6. Select Yes. 7. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u After selecting Yes, the system will

reboot.

339

340

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 340

HomeLink Universal Transceiver*

1HomeLink Universal Transceiver*

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.

Important Safety Precautions

* Not available on all models

uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 341

Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: Press and hold the two outside buttons for

about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.

If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.

Red Indicator

341Continued

uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

342

Featu res

1Training HomeLink

Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under Training a Button. You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2.

Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.

Standard transmitter

Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.

If you have any problems, see the devices instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 342

Training a Button

4.

3.

2.

5. A.

B.

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.

Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

Press and release the HomeLink button. Press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

Training Complete

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.

Training Complete

The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.HomeLink LED is constantly on.

YES NO

YES

YES NO NO

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 343

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Featu

res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528 -7876.

To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On. 2 Customized Features P. 298

Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.

Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.

To change the volume level, use the audio systems volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook

name, or a number. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

HFL Buttons

Models with one display

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up Button

Volume down

Selector Knob

PHONE Button

343Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL

344

Featu res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.

2 Customized Features P. 298

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 344

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

2 Speed Dial P. 361

HFL Status Display

Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Roam Status

Callers Name

Callers Number

Disabled Option

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.

usly paired phone with a

em. rom the system.

sly paired phone.

y PIN for a paired phone.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 345

HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

Phone Settings screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

Pair a phone to the system.

Replace a previo new phone.

Connect Phone*2

Bluetooth Device List

Add Bluetooth Device

Edit PIN

(Existing entry list)

Disconnect Connect a phone to the syst Disconnect a paired phone f

(Existing entry list)

Replace This Device

Delete This Device Delete a previou

Create a securit

Add Bluetooth

Device Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.

345Continued

346

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Input

from tory

from ook

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

reviously stored speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

t Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.

te Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

nsfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the

y answer an incoming call after about four

utomatically imported when a phone is paired to

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 346

Manual

New Entry Import Call His

Import Phoneb

Delete all of the p

Edi

Dele

(Existing entry list)

Delete All

Edit Speed Dial*1

Set calls to automatically tra vehicle.

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Set whether to automaticall seconds. Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be a HFL.

Phone

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

message function on and off.

r a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL text message.

to automatically read an incoming text message.

p as default.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 347

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Turn the text

New Text Message Alert

Message Auto Reading

Select whethe receives a new

Set the system

Text Messages*1

Default

Enable Text Message

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings grou

347Continued

348

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

nd missed calls.

e number from the call history to store as a mber. e number from the phonebook to store as a mber.

number to store as a speed dial number.

s speed dial list. e speed dial list.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 348

Phone menu screen 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

Phone menu

Speed Dial

Redial

Call History Text messages

Dial

Phonebook

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming a

Select a phon speed dial nu

Call History*1

Speed Dial*1

All

Manual Input

Dialed

Received Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Display the last 20 incoming calls.

New Entry

Import from Call History

Import from Phonebook

Select a phon speed dial nu

Enter a phone

More Speed Dials Display another paired phone

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

Dial*1

Redial*1

Enter a phone number to dial. Redial the last number dialed in the phones history.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in th

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

See the previous message.age

e See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 349

Text Messages*1

Read/Stop

Previous Mess

Next Messag

Phonebook*1 Display the paired phones phonebook.

Message is read aloud.

Reply

Call

Select a message and press .

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

349Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

350

Featu res

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL.

2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting P. 360

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 350

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.

Phone Setup

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 351

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Add

Bluetooth Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.

351Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

352

Featu res

1To change the pairing code setting

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending on your phone.

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 352

To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press . u Repeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code. 3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

Edit Pairing Code

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial entries, call history, and security PIN information from the previously paired phone.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 353

To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .

3. Rotate to select a paired phone you want to replace, then press .

4. Rotate to select Replace This Device, then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches a new phone. u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.

Continued 353

354

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 354

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete This Device, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 355

To turn on or off the text message function

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Text Messages, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Enable

Text Message. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .

To Set Up Text Message Options

355Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

356

Featu res

1To turn on or off the text message notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

1To set up the auto reading option

On: A text message is always read aloud. Off: A text message is not read aloud. Auto: A text message is read aloud only when driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 356

To turn on or off the text message notice

1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate to select New Text Message Alert, then press .

2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .

To set up the auto reading option 1. On the Text Messages screen, rotate

to select Message Auto Reading, then press . u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then press .

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 357

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to add a security PIN to, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press . 5. Enter a new four-digit number. u Rotate to select, then press .

Press to delete. Press OK to enter the security PIN.

6. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen in step

4.

To Create a Security PIN

Continued 357

358

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 358

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .

Automatic Transferring

Auto Answer

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speaker. Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 359

You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Ring

Tone. 3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone

or Off, then press .

Ring Tone

Continued 359

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

360

Featu res

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Voice

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 360

When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select

Automatic Phone Sync. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

.

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say Call and the voice tag name.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 361

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .

u Repeat the procedure to select New Entry.

3. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the linked cell

phones imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored

from Import from Call History or Import from Phonebook, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

Speed Dial

Mr.AAA 111AAA####

555EEE####

444DDD####

333CCC####

222BBB####

Mr.EEE

Mr.DDD

Mr.CCC

Mr.BBB

Select a method to store

Continued 361

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

362

Featu res

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 362

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Record, then press . 5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 363

To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Clear, then press . 5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 345

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Delete, then press . 4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

363Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

364

Featu res

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say Call and the phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice tag.

The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 364

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

Making a Call

Phone menu

Speed Dial

Redial

Call History Text messages

Dial

Phonebook

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.

2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 361

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 365

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .

3. Rotate to select a name, then press . u You can also search by letter. Rotate

to select Alphabet Search, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press .

u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 365

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

366

Featu res

1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.

2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 344 2 Speed Dial P. 361

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 366

To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press

. 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Select More Speed Dials to view another paired phones speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.

2 Speed Dial P. 361

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the corresponding preset buttons from the Phone screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 367

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press .

u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 348

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .

3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 367

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

368

Featu res

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 368

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.

Receiving a Call

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 369

The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.

Press the MENU button to display the options. Rotate to select the mute option, then press . u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Options During a Call

Mute Icon

Continued 369

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

370

Featu res

1Receiving a Text Message

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text message for the first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Text Message Alert setting to On.

2 To turn on or off the text message notice P. 356

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 370

HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.

2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message, then press . u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, press .

Receiving a Text Message

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Displaying Text Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.

To see the previous or next message, press on the text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate

to select Previous Message or Next Message, then press .

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 371

1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Text Messages, then

press . 4. Rotate to select a message, then press

. u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the message aloud.

Displaying Text Messages

Message List

Text Message

Continued 371

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

372

Featu res

1Using the Stop or Read option

This option changes to: Stop while the text message is read out. Select this

option to discontinue the message read out. Read when the system has finished reading out the

text message, or after you selected Stop. Select this option to hear the system read out the selected message.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 372

Using the Stop or Read option 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading

the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then press .

Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading

the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Reply, then press . 4. Rotate to select the reply message, then

press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 373

Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading

the message aloud. 2 Displaying Text Messages P. 371

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Call, then press .

373

374

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 374

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, ask a dealer or your local Honda.

To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HFL is unavailable.

2 How to customize P. 316

Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.

Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.

If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.

To change the volume level, select the audio system's VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.

Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.

2 Speed Dial P. 389

Up to five call histories can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

Models with two displays

(Talk) Button

Volume up

Microphone

(Hang-up/Back) Button

(Pick-up) Button

Volume down MENU Button

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu

res

1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 375

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. MENU button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone screen.

To go to the Phone menu screen: 1. Select . 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen. 3. Select .

Continued 375

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL

376

Featu res

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen and audio/information touch screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language. 2 How to customize P. 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 376

The audio/information screen and audio/information touch screen notify you when there is an incoming call.

HFL Status Display

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Callers Name

Callers Number

Roaming Status

Audio/information touch screen

Callers Name

Callers Number

Audio/information screen

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

Battery Level Status

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 377

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

2 Speed Dial P. 389

Limitations for Manual Operation

377

378

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Disconnect

Delete Delete a paired phone.

phone to the system.

Connect a paired device to the system.

onnect Connect Connect

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 378

HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use the system.

Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Phone.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Bluetooth Device List (Existing entry list)

Add Bluetooth Device Pair a new

Phone

C

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

ry

ok

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

usly stored speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a name. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

atically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 379

Manual InputNew Entry

Import from Call Histo

Import from Phonebo

Edit

Delete

(Existing entry list)Edit Speed Dial

Delete All Delete all of the previo

Ring Tone Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync Set phonebook and call history data to be autom

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.HondaLink Assist

379Continued

380

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

er a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL w text/e-mail message.

t/e-mail message function on and off.

l or text message account.

settings group as default.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 380

Select Account

Enable Text/EmailText/Email

New Message Notification Select wheth receives a ne

Turn the tex

Select a mai

Default Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

ming and missed calls.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

.

.

y

k Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

in the speed dial list.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 381

Phone menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select .

Display the last outgoing, incoCall History

Speed Dial

All

Manual Input

Dialed

Received

Display the last outgoing calls

Display the last incoming calls

New Entry

Import from Call Histor

Import from Phoneboo

Missed Display the last missed calls.

Dial

Redial

Enter a phone number to dial.

Redial the last number dialed.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number

Phonebook Display the paired phones phonebook.

381Continued

382

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

See the previous message.

See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.

ssage account.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 382

Text/Email Read/Stop(Existing a message list)

Select Account Select a mail or text me

Call

Reply

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands- free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is

paired to the system. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth- compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 383

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)

1. Select Phone. 2. Select Yes. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then select Continue. u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device. 4. Select your phone when it appears on the

list. u If your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information touch screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

Phone Setup

Continued 383

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

384

Featu res

1To change the currently paired phone

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth device list screen.

1To change the pairing code setting

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 384

To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired phone.

4. Select Connect , Connect , or Connect .

To change the pairing code setting 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Bluetooth tab. 5. Select Edit Pairing Code.

6. Select Random or Fixed.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 385

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.

4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Yes.

385Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

386

Featu res

1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options

To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 386

To turn on or off the text/e-mail function

1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Select On or Off.

To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Select On or Off.

To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speakers.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 387

You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Ring Tone. 3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

Ring Tone

Continued 387

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

388

Featu res

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Voice

Pref

Blank

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 388

When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.

3. Select On or Off.

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 389

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select New Entry.

From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell

phones imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.

5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. u Using the button, follow the prompts

to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

Speed Dial

Continued 389

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

390

Featu res

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 390

To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number

1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.

4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Record.

5. Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.

4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.

5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 391

To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.

4. Select a setting you want.

To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.

4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

391Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

392

Featu res

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 392

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phones contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

To add a new voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to add

phonetic modification to.

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 393

7. Select New Voice Tag. 8. Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the

screen. 9. Select Modify.

10. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

11. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.

393Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

394

Featu res

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 394

To modify a voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to modify

phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to

modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the

screen. 8. Select Modify. 9. Using Record or the button, follow the

prompts to complete the voice tag. 10. You will receive a confirmation message

on the screen, then select OK.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 395

To delete a modified voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete

phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

8. Select Delete. u The selected contact name has been

selected. 9. Select OK.

395Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

396

Featu res

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say the voice tag name.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, phone calls cannot be made with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink and are only made from Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 396

To delete all modified voice tags 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete

phonetic modification. u The contact name list appears.

7. Select Delete All. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen, then select Yes.

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

Making a Call

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 397

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Go to the Phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select a name. u You can also search by letter. Select

Search. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for

entering name, if multiple numbers exist select a number.

4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Dial. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for

entering numbers. 4. Select Dial. u Dialing starts automatically.

397Continued

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

398

Featu res

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed.

1To make a call using the Call History

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.

2 Speed Dial P. 389

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 398

To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Redial. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Call History. 3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information touch screen instead of the and buttons.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 399

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the incoming call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.

Receiving a Call

Continued 399

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

400

Featu res

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information touch screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 400

The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower half of the audio/information touch screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Options During a Call

Audio/information screen

Mute Icon

Mute Icon

Audio/information touch screen

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive massages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages and e-mails.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/e-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text message or e-mail for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.

2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice P. 386

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 401

HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message or e-mail.

2. Select Read to listen to the message. u The text message or e-mail is displayed.

The system automatically starts reading out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.

Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

Continued 401

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

402

Featu res

1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen.

You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time.

Select Account

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 402

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.

1. Go to the Phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Select Text Message or an e-mail account you want.

Selecting a Mail Account

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select or on the message screen.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 403

Displaying text messages 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Text/Email. u Select account if necessary.

3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the message aloud.

Displaying Messages

Message List

Text Message

Continued 403

404

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 404

Displaying e-mails 1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 381

2. Select Text/Email. u Select Select Account if necessary.

3. Select a folder. 4. Select a message. u The e-mail is displayed. The system

automatically starts reading the message aloud.

Folder List

Message List

E-mail

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 405

Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading

the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 403

2. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.

Reply to a message 1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading

the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 403

2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued 405

406

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

Featu res

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 406

Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call.

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu

res

1In Case of Emergency

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency services when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage

areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,

such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 407

Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition will be sent to the operator; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

In Case of Emergency

Continued 407

uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus

408

Featu res

1To enable notification

Setting options: On: Notification is available. Off: Disable the feature.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 408

To enable notification 1. Go to the Phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 378

2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Select On or Off.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 409

Compass*

Featu

res

1Compass*

Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions: Driving near power lines or stations Crossing a bridge Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large

object that can cause a magnetic disturbance When accessories such as antennas and roof racks

are mounted by magnets

1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area.

While setting the compass, select to cancel the setting mode and return to the previous screen.

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.

Compass Calibration If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass

settings screen. 3. Select Calibration. 4. Select Calibration Start. 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction

after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

409* Not available on all models

410

uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Featu res

1Compass Zone Selection

The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 410

Compass Zone Selection 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass

settings screen. 3. Select Zone Adjust. u The display shows the current zone

number the system is set to. 4. Select the zone number of your area (See

Zone Map).

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12

13 14

15 Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

* Not available on all m

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 411

Driving

This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 412 Maximum Load Limit........................ 415

Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 417 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 419 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 420

When Driving Starting the Engine .................. 421, 423 Precautions While Driving................. 428 Automatic Transmission/CVT*.......... 429 Shifting............................ 430, 434, 438 ECON Button ................................... 441

odels

Cruise Control ................................. 442 Front Sensor Camera* ..................... 445 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*....... 447 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* ...... 460 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*.... 464 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System........... 471

LaneWatchTM*.................................. 473 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 475 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation ......... 477

Braking Brake System ................................... 479

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 481 Brake Assist System ......................... 482 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* ..................................... 483

Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 491 Parking Sensor System* ................... 492

Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 496 Refueling

Fuel Information .............................. 497 How to Refuel ................................. 498

Fuel Economy Improving Fuel Economy.................. 499

Accessories and Modifications ........ 500

411

412

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 412

Before Driving

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.

Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.

Exterior Checks

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D

rivin g

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 413

Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 415

Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 126

Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 161 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Head Restraint Positions P. 164

Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 159 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 158

Interior Checks

Continued 413

414

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 414

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 37

Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 70

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D

rivin g

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.

2 Specifications P. 582, 584

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2 Specifications P. 582, 584

3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 415

Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - (1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Label Example

415Continued

416

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 416

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg)

Example2

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 417

Towing a Trailer

D

rivin g

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load.

Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information

2 Vehicle Specifications P. 582, 584

3WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.

Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. Excessive tongue load reduces front tire

traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.

To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed.

Towing Load Limits

Total Load

Tongue LoadTong

417Continued

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

418

D rivin

g

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 418

Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.

Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

Towing Equipment and Accessories

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer D

rivin g

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 419

Driving Safely with a Trailer

Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2 Towing Load Limits P. 417

Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving. Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

Drive slower than normal. Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly.

Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Turning and Braking

Automatic transmission/CVT models

419Continued

420

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 420

Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.

Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2 Emergency Towing P. 580

Driving in Hilly Terrain

Automatic transmission models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 421

When Driving

D

rivin g

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed

to start the engine.

Models without smart entry system

Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Brake Pedal

Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models

421Continued

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

422

D rivin

g

1Starting the Engine

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, wait for at

least 30 seconds before trying again. If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,

wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.

2 Immobilizer System P. 133

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 422

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2 Parking Brake P. 479

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Starting to Drive Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Manual transmission models

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.

2 Immobilizer System P. 133

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 423

Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed

to start the engine.

Models with smart entry system

Brake Pedal

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Brake Pedal

Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models

423Continued

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

424

D rivin

g

1Starting the Engine

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak.

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 564

The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 424

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Shift to (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

All models

Stopping the Engine

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Remote Engine Start*

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. While the vehicle is moving, the range may be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: You have disabled a remote engine start setting

using the multi-information display* or audio/ information touch screen*.

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). The shift lever is in a position other than (P. The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is

unlocked. You have already used the remote twice to start

the engine. Another registered smart entry remote is in the

vehicle.

3WARNING Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or cause unconsciousness.

Never use the remote engine starter when the vehicle is parked in a garage or other area with limited ventilation.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 425

You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.

To start the engine

The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u The turn signal lights come back on three times, twice, if a 10-minute

extension request was transmitted successfully.

Remote Engine Start*

With the doors locked, press the button, then press and hold the button.

Continued 425* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

426

D rivin

g

1Remote Engine Start*

There is any antenna failure. Door is unlocked with the built-in key. The engine oil pressure is low. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The security system alarm is not set.

The engine may stop while it is running if: You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of

starting the engine with the button on the smart entry remote.

The engine is stopped by using the smart entry remote.

Door is unlocked with the built-in key. The hood is open. The shift lever is in a position other than (P. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The engine oil pressure is low. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on if

there is a problem with the emissions control systems.

While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: The climate control system is activated in

recirculation mode. When it is cold outside: The defroster is activated at a moderately warm

temperature. The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are

activated.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 426

To stop the engine

Press and hold the button for one second.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D

rivin g

1Starting to Drive

The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.

When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 427

1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2 Parking Brake P. 479

3. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Starting to Drive

Automatic transmission/CVT models

When the engine was started using the button* on the smart entry remote

When the engine was started in any case

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission/CVT models

427* Not available on all models

428

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

D rivin

g

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.

NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 428

Precautions While Driving

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

In Rain

Other Precautions

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 429

Automatic Transmission/CVT*

The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Creeping

Kickdown

429* Not available on all models

430

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

1Shifting

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 430

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models

Reverse Used when reversing

Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the 7-speed

manual shift mode

Park Used when parking or starting the engine

Neutral Used when idling

Release Button Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills When driving in the 7-speed manual

shift mode

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 431

Shift Lever Operation

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Tachometers red zone

Models with multi-information display

Models with information display

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Tachometers red zone

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator

Continued 431

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

432

D rivin

g

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift indicator remains as 7.

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.

When the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7- speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal D driving mode.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 432

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.

When the shift lever is in (D: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.

When the shift lever is in (S: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator go off.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.

Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h) 2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h) 3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h) 4 to 5 45 mph (72 km/h) 5 to 6 50 mph (80 km/h) 6 to 7 55 mph (89 km/h)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 433

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed number)

Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number)

433

434

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 434

Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions

Automatic transmission models

Reverse Used when reversing

Drive Used for: Normal driving (gears change between

1st and 6th automatically) Temporally driving in the sequential

mode

Park Used when parking or starting the engine

Neutral Used when idling

Release Button Drive (S) Automatically changing gears between

1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at high speed)

Used when towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Used for driving in the sequential mode

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 435

Shift Lever Operation

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Tachometers red zone

Models with multi-information display

Models with information display

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Tachometers red zone

M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Continued 435

436

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 436

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift mode.

When the shift lever is in (D: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position indicator will come on.

Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.

Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

When the shift lever is in (S: The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode) indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.

If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shift up to 2nd gear. It does not shift automatically from 2nd through 6th gears.

You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.

When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position indicator go off.

Sequential Shift Mode

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gear continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h) 5th to 6th 52 mph (84 km/h)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 437

Second gear lock mode If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.

To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever from (S to (D.

Sequential Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to a lower gear)

Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to a higher gear)

437

438

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

D rivin

g

1Shifting

NOTICE Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.

NOTICE Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel cold.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 438

Shifting

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not grind.

Shift Lever Operation

Manual transmission models

uuWhen DrivinguShifting D

rivin g

1Shifting

Recommended Shift Points Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:

Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h) 3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h) 4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h) 5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)

Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h) 5th to 6th 52 mph (84 km/h)

4-cylinder models U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models

4-cylinder models Except U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 439

When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Continued 439

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

440

D rivin

g

1Shifting

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (28 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h) 3rd to 4th 36 mph (57 km/h) 4th to 5th 41 mph (66 km/h) 5th to 6th 44 mph (71 km/h)

6-cylinder models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 440

The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.

If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following: 1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift

lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R. 2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the

parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.

3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R . 4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start

the engine.

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Reverse Lockout

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 441

ECON Button

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.

*

441* Not available on all models

442

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

D rivin

g

1Cruise Control

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.

When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button.

While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.

3WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

Manual transmission models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 442

Cruise Control Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

When to use

Shift positions for cruise control: In (D or (S

Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Vehicle speed for cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

How to use

CRUISE MAIN*/CRUISE MODE* is on in the instrument panel. Cruise control is ready to use.

Press the CRUISE*/ MAIN* button on the steering wheel.

Models without ACC

Models with ACC

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 443

Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the steering angle on a straight road with cants.

To Set the Vehicle Speed

/SET Button

On when cruise control beginsPress and release

On

On

Models without ACC

Models with ACC

Models without adaptive cruise control

443Continued

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

444

D rivin

g

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

You can set the vehicle speed using the /SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) When the CRUISE*/MAIN* button is turned off

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 444

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.

Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the CRUISE*/MAIN* button. Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or

more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To Cancel

To decrease speed

To increase speed

CRUISE*/ MAIN* Button

CANCEL Button

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera* D

rivin g

1Front Sensor Camera*

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 445

Front Sensor Camera*

The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

Camera Location and Handling Tips

Front Sensor Camera

445Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera*

446

D rivin

g

1Front Sensor Camera*

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.

Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the

windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 446

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other vehicles.

Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.

3WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

3WARNING ACC has limited braking capability.

When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicles brakes.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 447

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When to use

Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

Shift position for ACC: In (D or (S.

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

447Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

448

D rivin

g

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or off.

ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 452

When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

Do not use ACC under the following conditions: On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in

continuous stop and go traffic. On roads with sharp turns. On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set

vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.

On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 448

How to use

Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.

ACC is on in the multi- information display. ACC is ready to use.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the multi-information display between mph and km/h.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 449

Take your foot off the pedal and press down the /SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.

When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed appear on the multi-information display.

To Set the Vehicle Speed

On when ACC begins

Press and release

/SET Button

Set Vehicle Speed

Set Vehicle Distance

Continued 449

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

450

D rivin

g

1When in Operation

If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle ahead.

Even if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the

same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster

than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance between the vehicles.

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.

2 Customized Features P. 106, 298, 316

Beep

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 450

There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicles set speed in order to keep the vehicles set following-distance from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following-Distance P. 455

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you and is detected by the radar, your vehicle starts to slow down.

When in Operation

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

A vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

1When you depress the accelerator pedal

While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the system does not apply the brakes to keep the following- distance, as well as the BRAKE message on the multi- information display does not appear.

2 When in Operation P. 450

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 451

There is no vehicle ahead Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed or a sufficient speed to keep the following-distance.

A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the multi- information display.

Continued 451

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

452

D rivin

g

1ACC Conditions and Limitations

The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* P. 483

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,

embankment, etc. You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 452

The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

Vehicle conditions The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The camera temperature gets too high. The parking brake is applied. When the radar sensor cover is dirty. When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats. When tire chains are installed.

ACC Conditions and Limitations

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 453

Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is

too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you

at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small

vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult

for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of

you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

453Continued

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

454

D rivin

g

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set following-distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 454

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.

Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

To increase speed

To decrease speed

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 455

Press the (distance) button to change the ACC following-distance. Each time you press the button, the following- distance (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short following- distances.

Determine the most appropriate following- distance setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-distance requirements set by local regulation.

To Set or Change Following-Distance

Distance Button

455Continued

456

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 456

The higher your vehicles following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-distance becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

Vehicle Distance When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

Short 84 feet

26 meters 1.1 sec

102 feet 31 meters

1.1 sec

Middle 111 feet

34 meters 1.5 sec

139 feet 43 meters

1.5 sec

Long 155 feet

48 meters 2.1 sec

202 feet 62 meters

2.1 sec

Extra Long

215 feet 66 meters

3.0 sec

285 feet 87 meters

3.0 sec

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 457

To cancel ACC, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the MAIN button. u The ACC indicator (white) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal.

To Cancel

CANCEL Button

MAIN Button

Continued 457

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

458

D rivin

g

1Automatic cancellation

Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 458

Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. Abrupt steering wheel movement. When the ABS, VSA or CMBSTM is activated. When the ABS or VSA system indicator comes on. When you manually apply the parking brake. When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* D

rivin g

1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-distance from a vehicle ahead of you.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 459

Press and hold the (distance) button for one second.

Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second.

To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

ACC ON Cruise Control ON

Distance Button

459

460

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

D rivin

g

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 462

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 460

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.

The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the multi-information display.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane

markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

How the System Works

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* D

rivin g

1How the System Activates

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 70

RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: Not driven within a traffic lane. Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of

a lane. Driven in a narrow lane.

1RDM On and Off

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the multi-information display, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 461

The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in continuous operation. The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,

braking or steering.

Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and

the message appears on the multi- information display when the system is on.

How the System Activates

RDM On and Off

RDM Button

Indicator

Continued 461

462

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 462

The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

RDM Conditions and Limitations

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 463

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection

or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

lines (or yellow lines). Driving on roads with double lines.

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet

snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains are installed.

463

464

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

D rivin

g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages* P. 96

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 469

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 464

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. () If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

LKAS camera Monitors the lane lines.

Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D

rivin g

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

The LKAS may not function as designed on while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected, system will recover automatically.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 465

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Lane Keep Support Function

Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

Warning Area

Continued 465* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

466

D rivin

g

1When the System can be Used

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 466

The system can be used when the following conditions are met. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and

your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in continuous operation.

How to activate the system 1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the multi-information

display. The system is ready to use.

2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the multi-

information display. The system is activated.

When the System can be Used

MAIN Button

LKAS Button

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D

rivin g

1When the System can be Used

The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines again, it comes back on automatically.

1To cancel

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 467

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid

ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

To cancel

MAIN Button

LKAS Button

Continued 467

468

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 468

The system operation is suspended if you:

Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off resumes the

LKAS.

Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop

or operate intermittently.

Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45

mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.

The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the multi- information display change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

All models

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 469

The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including

the windshield, gets dirty. The ABS or VSA system engages. The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

LKAS Conditions and Limitations

469Continued

470

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 470

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road

repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection

or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white

lines (or yellow lines). Driving on roads with double lines.

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet

snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

rivin g

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 471

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.

VSA Operation

VSA System Indicator

471Continued

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

472

D rivin

g

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

With the button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 472

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially turn the VSA features on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

The traction control stops fully functioning, allows the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA OFF indicator will also come on.

To turn it on again, press the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

VSA OFF Button

VSA OFF Indicator

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM* D

rivin g

1LaneWatchTM*

Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: Your vehicles suspension has been altered,

changing the height of the vehicle. Your tires are over or under inflated. Your tires or wheels are of varied size or

construction.

3WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 473

LaneWatchTM*

Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passengers side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.

1 2

CameraAudio/Information Screen

Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side.

Press the LaneWatch button.

Pull the turn signal lever back.

Press the LaneWatch button again.

The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.

The system activates when you:

The system deactivates when you:

473Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*

474

D rivin

g

1LaneWatchTM*

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.

For proper LaneWatch operation: The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind.

Do not touch the camera lens.

1Reference Lines

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if: The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle.

The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 474

Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information touch screen. Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when

you operate the turn signal light lever. Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch

monitor. Display Time after Turn Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time

after you pull the turn signal lever back. Display: Adjusts display settings.

2 Customized Features P. 316

Reference Lines Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 farther away.

2 3

1

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

rivin g

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather. Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer

weather. The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the

steering wheel. You drive on snowy or slippery roads. Snow chains are used.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: A compact spare tire is used. There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,

such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.

Snow chains are used.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 475

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display*.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you: Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. Rotate the tires. Replace one or more tires.

Before calibrating the TPMS: Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

2 Checking Tires P. 537

Make sure: The vehicle is at a complete stop.

The shift lever is in (N .

The shift lever is in (P .

The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

TPMS Calibration

Manual transmission models

Automatic transmission/CVT models

All models

475Continued* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

476

D rivin

g

1TPMS Calibration

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed.

The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).

During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

You can calibrate the system using the audio/ information screen* or audio/information touch screen*.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

If the snow chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 476

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice, indicating the calibration process has begun. If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does

not blink, confirm the above conditions then press and hold the TPMS button again.

The calibration process finishes automatically.

You can calibrate the system from the customized features on the multi-information display. 1. Press the / button to select Vehicle

Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button. u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.

2. Press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the

customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.

3. Press the / button and select Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button. u Calibration Started screen appears,

then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed to Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3.

The calibration process finishes automatically.

TPMS Button

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Models with information display

Models with multi-information display

4

4

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 477

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

477Continued

478

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 478

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 479

Braking

D

rivin g

1Parking Brake

NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.

If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the multi-information display*.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Pull the lever fully up without pressing the release button.

To release: 1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold

the release button. 2. Lower the lever down all the way, then

release the button.

Parking Brake

479Continued* Not available on all models

uuBrakinguBrake System

480

D rivin

g

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 480

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

2 Brake Assist System P. 482 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 481

Foot Brake

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) D

rivin g

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.

When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS: When driving on rough road surfaces, including

when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow.

When snow chains are installed.

The following may be observed with the ABS system: Motor sounds coming from the engine

compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started while vehicle is accelerates.

Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 481

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: Wet or snow covered roads. Roads paved with stone. Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

ABS

481

482

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 482

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Brake Assist System

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D

rivin g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.

1How the system works

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you.

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 483

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

How the system works

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.

When to use

The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected

in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.

Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.

483Continued* Not available on all models

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

484

D rivin

g

1When the system activates

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487

The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front end of the dashboard. Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Lens

1Vibration alert on the steering wheel

Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.

2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator P. 77

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 484

When the system activates

At systems earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multi- information display setting options.

2 List of customizable options P. 109

Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the

steering wheel, etc.).

The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change

lanes, etc.)

Beep

Head-up Warning Lights

Visual Alerts

Audible Alert Tactile Alert

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 485

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Collision Alert Stages

Distance between vehicles

CMBSTM

The radar sensor detects a vehicle

Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking

Stage one

There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.

When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.

In case of an oncoming vehicle detected, rapid vibration is provided.

Stage two

The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly applied

Stage three

The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.

Forcefully applied

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

Normal ShortLong

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

485Continued

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

486

D rivin

g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:

2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 487

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 486

Press this button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.

When the CMBSTM is off: The beeper sounds. The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument

panel comes on. A message on the multi-information display

reminds you that the system is off.

The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or OFF setting each time you start the engine.

CMBSTM On and Off

* Not available on all models

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 487

The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera* P. 445

Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,

reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

487Continued* Not available on all models

488

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 488

Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,

improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.

Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is

too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you

at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small

vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for

the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of

you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* D

rivin g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 489

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.

Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrians shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.

When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.

When a pedestrian blends in with the background. When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or

they are running. When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an

unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

489Continued

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

490

D rivin

g

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)*

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,

embankment, etc. You drive the vehicle where the water is deep. Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 490

The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

With Little Chance of a Collision

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 491

Parking Your Vehicle

D

rivin g

1Parking Your Vehicle

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal. Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle

stops completely.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .

3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1.

4. Turn off the engine.

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

All models

491

492

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

D rivin

g

1Parking Sensor System*

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when: The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or

dirt. The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,

bumps, or a hill. The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. The system is affected by devices that emit

ultrasonic waves. Driving in bad weather.

The system may not sense: Thin or low objects. Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,

or sponge. Objects directly under the bumper.

Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 492

Parking Sensor System*

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

The sensor location and range

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less

Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors

Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less

Rear Center Sensors

* Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

1Parking Sensor System*

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 493

Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.

The rear center and corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in any position other than (P, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Continued 493* Not available on all models

494

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 494

When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter

*1:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

Length of the intermittent beep

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator Audio/information screen

Corner Sensors Center Sensors

Moderate Rear: About 43-24 in

(110-60 cm) Blinks in Yellow*1

Short About 24-18 in

(60-45 cm) About 24-18 in

(60-45 cm) Blinks in Amber

Very short About 18-14 in

(45-35 cm) About 18-14 in

(45-35 cm)

Continuous About 14 in

(35 cm) or less About 14 in

(35 cm) or less Blinks in Red

Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle.

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D

rivin g

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

When you shift to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 495

1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator

in the button blinks. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

Turning off All Rear Sensors

495

496

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 496

Multi-View Rear Camera

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the selector knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected. If you shift out of (R in Top View mode, then shift into (R again 10 seconds later, Wide mode is selected.

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Top Down View Mode

Normal View Mode

Wide View Mode

Guidelines

Bumper

Camera

Approx. 118 inches (3 m)

Approx. 79 inches (2 m)

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 497

Refueling

D

rivin g

1Fuel Information

NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Fuel Information Fuel recommendation

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

497

498

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

D rivin

g

1How to Refuel

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.

Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 498

How to Refuel 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.

2. Turn off the engine. 3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at

the foot of the drivers seat. u The fuel fill door opens.

4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 6. Insert the filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will

click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.

7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Push

Cap

Cap

Holder

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 499

Fuel Economy

D

rivin g

1Improving Fuel Economy

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Miles driven Gallons of fuel

Miles per Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

Improving Fuel Economy Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display*/multi-information display*. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy

499* Not available on all models

500

D rivin

g

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 500

Accessories and Modifications

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs

of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

2 Fuses P. 576

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Modifications Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability.

Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 501

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 502 Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 503 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 504

Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 505 Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 513 Opening the Hood ........................... 515 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 517 Oil Check......................................... 518 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 520 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 521

Engine Coolant ................................ 523 Transmission Fluid............................ 525 Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 527 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 528

Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 529 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 535

Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 537 Tire and Loading Information Label ..... 538 Tire Labeling .................................... 538 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)...... 540 Wear Indicators................................ 542

Tire Service Life................................ 542 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 543 Tire Rotation.................................... 544 Winter Tires ..................................... 545

Battery............................................... 546 Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery ........... 547 Climate Control System Maintenance ....549 Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 550 Exterior Care.................................... 552

501

502

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 502

Before Performing Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display*/multi- information display*.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507, 511

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

2 Authorized Manuals P. 593

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 527

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 537

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 529

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 535

Types of Inspection and Maintenance

* Not available on all models

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M

ain ten

an ce

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.

3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 503

Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.

The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

Maintenance Safety

Vehicle Safety

503

504

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 504

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 505

Maintenance MinderTM

M

ain ten

an ce

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the information display.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 507

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display*/multi-information display* every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly

until the engine oil life appears on the information display.

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Models with information display

505Continued* Not available on all models

506

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 506

To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display

Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.

Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is switched.

The SERVICE message also starts to appear along with the engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes.

The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.

The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display blinks.

The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when

the display is switched.

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

onditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). transmission (CVT) models s areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission

quires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission 5,000 miles (40,000 km).

in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), in very low temperatures (under w a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2

ace dust and pollen filter*3

ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4,*5

ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*6,*7

ct valve clearance ace engine coolant

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 507

Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder MessageMaintenance

Minder Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#

Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty c *3: If you drive primarily

from diesel-powered *4: Continuously variable *5: Driving in mountainou

temperatures. This re Maintenance Minder. fluid changed every 2

*6: 6-cylinder models *7: If you drive regularly

-20 F, -29 C), or to

CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl

Repl Inspe

3 Repl 4 Repl

Repl Inspe

5 Repl

507Continued

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

508

M ain

ten an

ce

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

You can reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 508

Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly

pressing the (Select/Reset) knob. 3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds

or more. u The engine oil life indicator and the

maintenance item codes blink.

4. Press the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items

disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Resetting the Display

* Not available on all models

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the information display.

2 Maintenance Service Items P. 511

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 509

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the multi-information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears

on the multi-information display.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Models with multi-information display

Button

Maintenance Item Codes

Remaining Engine Oil Life

509Continued

510

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 510

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the

display by pressing the (Information) button, this message will go off.

The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon.

Maintenance Due Now 5 % The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

percent. Press the button to switch to another display.

The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.

Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the

button to switch to another display.

The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M

ain ten

an ce

1Maintenance Service Items

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

onditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). transmission (CVT) models

us areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission quires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission 5,000 miles (40,000 km).

in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), in very low temperatures (under - a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2

ace dust and pollen filter*3

ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4, *5

ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*6, *7

ct valve clearance ace engine coolant

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 511

Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder MessageSystem Message

Indicator

Sub ItemsMain Item

*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1

B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#

Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty c *3: If you drive primarily

from diesel-powered *4: Continuously variable *5: Driving in mountaino

temperatures. This re Maintenance Minder. fluid changed every 2

*6: 6-cylinder models *7: If you drive regularly

20 F, -29 C), or tow

CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl

Repl Inspe

3 Repl 4 Repl

Repl Inspe

5 Repl

511Continued

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

512

M ain

ten an

ce

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

You can reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen* or audio/ information touch screen*.

2 Customized Features P. 298, 316

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 512

Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET

button. 3. Press the button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display. 4. Press the SEL/RESET button. u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.

5. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display

returns to 100%.

To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Resetting the Display

Engine Oil Life

SEL/RESET Button

Maintenance Item Codes (Information) Button

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 513

Maintenance Under the Hood

M

ain ten

an ce

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)

Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)

Battery

Manual transmission models

Maintenance Items Under the Hood 4-cylinder models

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

513Continued

514

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

M ain

ten an

ce

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)

Manual transmission models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 514

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Engine Oil Fill Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood M

ain ten

an ce

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 515

Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the

lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.

3. Pull up the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

Hood Release Handle

Pull

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

4-cylinder models

515Continued

516

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 516

4. Lift the hood up most of the way. u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the

rest of the way and hold it up.

When closing, lower it to approximately 12 inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with your hands.

6-cylinder models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil M

ain ten

an ce

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 517

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown here.

Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

Genuine Honda Motor Oil Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

Ambient Temperature

517

518

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

M ain

ten an

ce

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 518

Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check M

ain ten

an ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 519

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Upper Mark Lower Mark

519

520

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

M ain

ten an

ce

1Adding Engine Oil

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 520

Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Engine Oil Fill Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 521

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the information display*/multi-information display*.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.

3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Drain Bolt

Washer

Drain Bolt

Washer

521Continued* Not available on all models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

522

M ain

ten an

ce

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 522

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.

5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to

the oil gasket. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:

30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)

29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including

filter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

4.5 US qt (4.3 L) 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine. 10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.

11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Oil Filter

Oil Filter

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M

ain ten

an ce

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE If temperatures consistently below 22F (30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more information.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 523

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

523Continued

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

524

M ain

ten an

ce

1Radiator

NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 524

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Radiator

Radiator Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid M

ain ten

an ce

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

1Manual Transmission Fluid

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure. Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 525

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

Specified fluid: HCF-2

Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

4-cylinder models with continuously variable transmission (CVT)

4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission

525Continued

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

526

M ain

ten an

ce

1Automatic Transmission Fluid

NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 526

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)

6-cylinder models with automatic transmission

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid M

ain ten

an ce

1Brake/Clutch Fluid

NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

1Checking the Clutch Fluid

If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn clutch plate as soon as possible.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 527

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid

Brake Reservoir

MIN

MAX

Checking the Clutch Fluid

Manual transmission models

Clutch Reservoir

MIN

MAX

527

528

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

M ain

ten an

ce

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 528

Refilling Window Washer Fluid Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator comes on.

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Canadian models with information display

Canadian models with multi-information display

All models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 529

Replacing Light Bulbs

M

ain ten

an ce

1Headlight Bulbs

NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Models with halogen headlights

All models

Models with halogen headlights

1High Beam Headlights

High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Models with LED headlights

Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the upper part of the air intake duct and the air intake tube.

1. Remove the reserve tank.

High beam headlight: LED type*

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*

Low beam headlight: LED type*

Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)*

High Beam Headlights Models with halogen headlights

Tube

Holding Clip

Holding Clips

Driver side

6-cylinder models

Passenger side

All models

529Continued* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

530

M ain

ten an

ce

1High Beam Headlights

Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.

Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until it is flat.

Holding clip

Center pin

Push until the pin is flat.

1Low Beam Headlights

Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Models with LED headlights

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 530

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to

remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to

remove. 3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

Tab Coupler

Bulb

Low Beam Headlights Models with halogen headlights

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Lights* M

ain ten

an ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 531

Fog Lights*

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal Lights Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Models with LED headlights

Models with LED headlights

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

531* Not available on all models

532

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

M ain

ten an

ce

1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Center pin

Push until the pin is flat.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 532

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the opposite side from the light being replaced. Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to the left. Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the right.

2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and pull the inner fender back.

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.

4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)

Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights

Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights

Models with halogen headlights and LED type parking/daytime running lights

Models with halogen headlights and bulb type parking lights

Holding Clip

Screw

Bulb

Socket

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights M

ain ten

an ce

1Brake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights

Rear side marker/taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Clip

Push until the pin is flat.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 533

Brake Light, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs and Rear Side Marker/Taillights When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the tabs on both sides.

2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.

4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Brake Light: 21 W Back-Up Light: 16 W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) Rear Side Marker/Taillight: LED

Holding Clip

TabsCargo Hook

Bulb Socket

533

534

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 534

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Rear License Plate Light: 5 W

Lens

Bulb

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 535

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

M

ain ten

an ce

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.

Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the

passenger side.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade from the wiper arm.

Tab

535Continued

536

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 536

3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out.

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and

the retainer grooves.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the

indent of the wiper blade. 6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,

then push down the lock tab. 7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,

then the driver side.

Blade

Top Retainer

Blade

Tab

Indent

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 537

Checking and Maintaining Tires

M

ain ten

an ce

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 475

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.

2 Wear Indicators P. 542

Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

537

538

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 215/55R17 94V 215: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 538

Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Label Example

Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Maximum Tire Load

Maximum Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year Week

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 539

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Glossary of Tire Terminology

539

540

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

M ain

ten an

ce

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 540

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M

ain ten

an ce

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 541

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Traction

Temperature

541

542

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

M ain

ten an

ce

1Checking Tires

High speed driving We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.

*1: Except Canadian models

Tire Size 235/45R18 94V Pressure Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

Tire Size 235/40R19 96V Pressure Front: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2)

Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

Models with 235/45R18 tires*1

Models with 235/40R19 tires

Models with 235/45R18 tires*1

Models with 235/40R19 tires

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 542

Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear Indicator mark

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement M

ain ten

an ce

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 543

Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.

543

544

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

M ain

ten an

ce

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 475

FRONT

Direction Mark

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 544

Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display*/ multi-information display* helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

* Not available on all models

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires M

ain ten

an ce

1Winter Tires

NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 545

Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

Follow the chain manufacturers instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.

Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040

Models with 215/55R17 tires

Models with 235/45R18 tires

Models with 235/40R19 tires

545

546

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 546

Battery

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Please consult a dealer for more information.

3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

Checking the Battery Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

The battery condition is being monitored by the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is a problem with the sensor, the warning message on the information display*/multi- information display* will let you know. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.

2 Reactivating the audio system P. 189

The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 116

The navigation system* is disabled. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 547

Remote Transmitter Care

M

ain ten

an ce

1Replacing the Button Battery

NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips- head screwdriver.

2. Open the remote transmitter. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.

3. Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver.

4. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.

Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*

Screw Battery type: CR1620

Battery

547Continued* Not available on all models

548

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 548

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the smart entry remote. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

Smart Entry Remote*

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 549

Climate Control System Maintenance

M

ain ten

an ce

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

549

550

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 550

Cleaning

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Cleaning Seat Belts

Opening

Cleaning the Window

uuCleaninguInterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 551

The floor mats for the driver, and the rear passenger on the passengers side hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mats from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

Floor Mats

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Front (driver side)

Rear (passenger side)

Maintaining Genuine Leather*

551* Not available on all models

552

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 552

Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. Fold in the door mirrors. Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers*.

Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,

use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Washing the Vehicle

Using an Automated Car Wash

Using High Pressure Cleaners

* Not available on all models

uuCleaninguExterior Care M

ain ten

an ce

1Applying Wax

NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 553

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

Applying Wax

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Cleaning the Window

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Continued 553

554

uuCleaninguExterior Care

M ain

ten an

ce

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 554

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 555

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Types of Tools .................................. 556

If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 557

Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine........................ 563 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak..........................................564

Emergency Engine Stop ................... 565 Jump Starting.................................... 566 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 569

Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 570

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................. 572

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 572

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 573

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 574

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 574

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 575

Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 576 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 579

Emergency Towing........................... 580

555

556

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 556

Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools are stored in the trunk.

Types of Tools

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle

Jack

Jack Handle BarTool Case

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 557

If a Tire Goes Flat

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Changing a Flat Tire

Follow these compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Do not use the jack if it doesnt work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to (P .

2. Move the shift lever to (R .

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

All models

557Continued

558

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 558

1. Open the trunk floor lid.

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the tool case.

3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

Tool Case

Spare Tire

Wheel Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 559

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

559Continued

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

560

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 560

1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

How to Set Up the Jack

Jacking Points

Jacking Point

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 561

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the

lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)

Replacing the Flat Tire

Continued 561

uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

562

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1Storing the Flat Tire

3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 562

1. Remove the center cap. 2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire

well. 3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing

bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.

4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low appears on the multi-information display*, but this is normal.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 475

Storing the Flat Tire

Spacer Cone Wing Bolt

For compact spare tire

For full-size tire

TPMS and the Spare Tire

* Not available on all models

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 563

Engine Does Not Start

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

cklist

n display. ton message appears k P. 564 rating range. ange P. 141

ess. at all

again.

g, the engine cannot be started.

dealer.

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it.

2 Jump Starting P. 566

Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.

Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Check for a message on the multi-informatio If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start But

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Wea uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its ope

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating R Check brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightn If the interior lights are dim or do not come on

2 Battery P. 546 If the interior lights come on normally

2 Fuses P. 576

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine

2 Starting the Engine P. 421, 423

Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin

2 Immobilizer System P. 133

Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank.

2 Fuel Gauge P. 98

Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 579

If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 580

Models with multi-information display Models with smart entry system

563

564

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 564

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start.

The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi- information display.

Start the engine as follows. 1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The indicator flashes for about 30

seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the indicator stays on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Models with smart entry system

Models with multi-information display

All models

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Emergency Engine Stop

Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 565

Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the transmission to utilize engine braking.

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Models with smart entry system

U.S. automatic transmission/CVT models

Canadian automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

565

566

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 566

Jump Starting

1Jump Starting

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Jump Starting Procedure Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's battery + terminal.

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery

charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15- volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.

Booster Battery

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Booster Battery

uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Jump Starting

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 567

4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.

6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Continued 567

568

uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 568

Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

What to Do After the Engine Starts

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 569

Shift Lever Does Not Move

H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat- tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key down, press the shift

lever release button and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Releasing the Lock

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Slot

Cover

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

Release Button

Shift Lock Release Slot

569

570

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 570

Overheating

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the mark may damage the engine.

3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

H

How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses

power. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then open the hood.

H

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 571

Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the engine coolant

reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.

MAX

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

MIN

571

572

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 572

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minute. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine

and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 573

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.

What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.

3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off.

When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.

Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message

573

574

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 574

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine

speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.

What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

U.S.

Canada

uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 575

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

575

576

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 576

Fuses

Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, Circuit protected and fuse rating

turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

* Not available on all models

*2:Models with LKAS *3:Models without LKAS *4:4-cylinder models *5:6-cylinder models

Circuit Protected Amps 1 Battery 125 A

2

EPS 70 A Fuse Box Main 1 (60 A)

Fuse Box Option 1 (40 A)

ABS/VSA FSR 20 A*2

40 A*3

ABS/VSA Motor 40 A*2

30 A*3

3

4 Front Fog Light* (10 A) 5 Horn 10 A 6 Stop Light 10 A 7 FI Sub 15 A 8 DRL (7.5 A) 9 IG Coil 15 A

10 Injector*4

*5

(20 A)*4

*5

*6:Models with smart entry system *7:Models without smart entry system

Circuit Protected Amps 11 Hazard 15 A

12

Fuse Box Main 2 60 A Fuse Box Option 2 (40 A)

IG Main 1 30 A*6

50 A*7

IG Main 2*6

*7

30 A*6

*7

Sub Fan Motor 20 A*4

30 A*5

Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A Fuse Box 30 A

Wiper Motor 30 A Main Fan Motor 30 A Starter Motor*6

*7

30 A*6

*7

13 Rear Defogger 40 A 14 Heater Motor 40 A 15 FI Main 15 A

16 Heated Door Mirror*, *4

*5

(10 A)*4

*5

17 MG Clutch 7.5 A 18 DBW 15 A 19 Small Light 20 A 20 Interior Light 7.5 A

uuFusesuFuse Locations H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 577

*2:Models with LKAS *3:Models without LKAS

Circuit Protected Amps 21 Back Up 10 A 22 Audio 10 A 23 Fan Timer 7.5 A 24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A 25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A

26 ABS/VSA ECU*2

*3

7.5 A*2

*3

577Continued

578

uuFusesuFuse Locations

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 578

Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Circuit Protected Amps 1 A/C 7.5 A 2 DRL 7.5 A 3 4 5 Meter 7.5 A 6 SRS 7.5 A 7 Option* (7.5 A) 8 MISS SOL 10 A 9 Fuel Pump 20 A

* Not available on all models

10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A 11 12 Front Wiper 7.5 A 13 ACG 15 A

14 Rear Accessory Power Socket

(Console Compartment) (20 A)

15 Drivers Power Seat

Reclining* (20 A)

16 Moonroof* (20 A) 17 Front Seat Heaters* (20 A) 18

19 Passenger Side Door

Unlock 10 A

20 Driver Side Rear Door

Unlock* 10 A

21 Drivers Door Lock 10 A 22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A 23 Drivers Door Unlock 10 A 24 SRS 10 A 25 Illumination 10 A 26 Key Lock 7.5 A 27 Parking Lights 10 A 28 Lumbar Support* (10 A) 29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A 30 Washer 15 A 31 SMART* (10 A) 32 Drivers Power Window 20 A

Circuit Protected Amps

33 Front Passengers Power

Window 20 A

34 Rear Driver Side Power

Window* 20 A

35 Rear Passenger Side Power

Window* 20 A

36 Drivers Power Seat Sliding* (20 A) 37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A 38 39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A

40 Front Accessory Power Socket

(Console Panel) 20 A

41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock* 10 A 42 Door Lock 20 A a Audio* (7.5 A) b ACM* (20 A) c Rear Seat Heaters* (15 A) d Premium Amp* (20 A) e f

g Passengers Power Seat

Reclining* (20 A)

h Passengers Power Seat

Sliding* (20 A)

Circuit Protected Amps

uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses H

an d

lin g

th e U

n exp

ected

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 576 to 578.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 579

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn

headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it

with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

579

580

H an

d lin

g th

e U n

exp ected

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 580

Emergency Towing

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.

NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 581

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 582 Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number ......................................... 586

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 587 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 588

Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 589

Warranty Coverages ........................ 591 Authorized Manuals......................... 593 Customer Service Information......... 594

581

582

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 582

Specifications

Vehicle Specifications

*1: LX-S models *2: Except LX-S models *3: LX models *4: Except LX models

Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)*1

4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)*2

Canada: 1,900 kg*3

1,930 kg*4

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*1

2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2

Canada: 1,040 kg*3

1,055 kg*4

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)*1

2,006 lbs (910 kg)*2

Canada: 890 kg*3

910 kg*4

Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

4-cylinder models

* Not available on all models

Engine Specifications

Fuel

Washer Fluid

Displacement 144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK

DILKAR7G11GS DILKAR7H11GS

DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S

Fuel: Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 4.85

Light Bulbs

*5: Models with halogen headlights *6: Models with LED headlights *7: Models with bulb type parking lights *8: Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)*5

LED*6

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)*5

LED*6

Fog Lights* LED Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights*5, *7

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights*5, *8 28/8W (Amber)

Front Turn Signal Lights*6 LED Front Side Marker Lights*6 LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) * LED

Brake Lights 21W Rear Side Marker/Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

uuSpecificationsu In

fo rm

atio n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 583

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified HCF-2 Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 )

Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

*1: Continuously variable transmission (CVT) models *2: Manual transmission models

Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.66 US gal (6.28 )*1

1.66 US gal (6.30 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the reserve tank)

Tire

*3: U.S. LX-S and Canadian LX models *4: U.S. EX, EX-L models and Canadian EX models *5: Canadian Touring models

Regular

Size 215/55R17 94V*3

235/45R18 94V*4

235/40R19 96V*5

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 33 (225 [2.3])*3, *4

33 (230 [2.3])*5

Rear 33 (225 [2.3])*3, *4

32 (220 [2.2])*5

Compact Spare

Size T135/90D16 102M*3, *4

T135/80D17 103M*5

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular

17 x 7 1/2J*3

18 x 8J*4

19 x 8J*5

Compact Spare 16 x 4T*3

17 x 4T*4, *5

583Continued

584

uuSpecificationsu

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 584

Vehicle Specifications

*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models

Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)*1

4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*2

Canada: 1,990 kg*1

2,030 kg*2

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)*1

2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2

Canada: 1,090 kg*1

1,145 kg*2

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)

Canada: 910 kg Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

6-cylinder models

Engine Specifications

Fuel

Washer Fluid

Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11 DENSO SXU22HCR11

Fuel: Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )

Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 4.85

Light Bulbs

*3: Models with halogen headlights *4: Models with LED headlights

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)*3

LED*4

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)*3

LED*4

Fog Lights LED Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights*3 28/8W (Amber) Front Turn Signal Lights*4 LED Front Side Marker Lights*4 LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)

LED

Brake Lights 21W Rear Side Marker/Taillights LED Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W Courtesy Lights 2CP

uuSpecificationsu In

fo rm

atio n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 585

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)

Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 )

Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.2 US qt (2.1 )

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models

Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.66 US gal (6.3 )*1

1.72 US gal (6.5 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the reserve tank)

Tire

*3: U.S. EX-L V6 models *4: U.S. Touring models and Canadian V6 Touring models

Regular

Size 235/45R18 94V*3

235/40R19 96V*4

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 33 (225 [2.3])*3

33 (230 [2.3])*4

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])*3, *4

Compact Spare

Size T135/90D16 102M*3

T135/80D17 103M*4

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular

18 x 8J*3

19 x 8J*4

Compact Spare 16 x 4T*3

17 x 4T*4

585

586

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 586

Identification Numbers

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Cover

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicles VIN, engine number and transmission number are shown as follows.

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number

Manual Transmission Number

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Number

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission Number

Manual Transmission Number

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 587

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

In

fo rm

atio n

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/251/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Audio System Bluetooth Audio Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Bluetooth Universal Transceiver Immobilizer System Keyless Access System*

Remote Transmitter Wireless Charger*

587* Not available on all models

588

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 588

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 589

Emissions Testing

In

fo rm

atio n

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has Readiness Codes, as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual

transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about three minutes.

6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

589Continued

590

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 590

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 591

Warranty Coverages

In

fo rm

atio n

U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

591Continued

592

uuWarranty Coveragesu

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 592

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 593

Authorized Manuals

In

fo rm

atio n

Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners: Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners: Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

593

594

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 594

Customer Service Information

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and Transmission Number P. 586

Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.

They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners: Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546

uuCustomer Service Informationu In

fo rm

atio n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 595

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, visit www.gracenote.com. When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums. Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates a year. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at

Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in Canada). CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or

Gracenote END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non- commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.

595Continued

596

uuCustomer Service Informationu

In fo

rm atio

n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 596

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error- free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. Gracenote 2009

Requirements to access Pandora Latest version of the Pandora application

installed on your mobile device. (Visit the Apple iTunes store or Google Play Marketplace to download the latest version.)

Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)

Connection to the internet via WiFi or cellular data network.

Android devices must be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.

Disclaimer of Pandora

uuCustomer Service Informationu In

fo rm

atio n

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 597

Limitations Access to Pandora requires an active

internet connection Ability to access Pandora through this

system is subject to change without notice

Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying songs, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.

Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.

Pandora is only available in the United States.

597

Index

598

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 598

Index

Numbers 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 432

Operation ................................................ 433

A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 481 Accessories and Modifications ................. 500 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 174 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)........... 85, 447 Additives

Coolant ................................................... 523 Engine Oil................................................ 517 Washer.................................................... 528

Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 517 Adjusting

Clock....................................................... 116 Front Seats .............................................. 161 Head Restraints........................................ 164 Mirrors .................................................... 159 Rear Seats................................................ 168 Steering Wheel ........................................ 158 Temperature.................................... 101, 105

AhaTM ......................................................... 264 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) .................................................... 180 Changing the Mode ................................ 180 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 181

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 549 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 180

Sensor..................................................... 183 Synchronized Mode................................. 182 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180

Air Pressure............................... 538, 583, 585 Airbags ........................................................ 41

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 47 After a Collision ........................................ 44 Airbag Care............................................... 53 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 44 Indicator.............................................. 51, 75 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 52 Sensors ..................................................... 41 Side Airbags .............................................. 48 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 50

AM/FM Radio.................................... 199, 239 Android Auto ........................................... 281 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481

Indicator.................................................... 75 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 277 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 190 Audio System............................................ 186

Adjusting the Sound........................ 197, 232 Audio/Information Screen................ 193, 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen ............. 218 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 188 Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout .. 221 Closing Apps........................................... 231 Display Setup .................................. 198, 233 Error Messages........................................ 286 General Information ................................ 291

Home Screen .......................................... 224 Internet Radio ......................... 207, 262, 264 iPod ........................................ 204, 255, 294 Limitations for Manual Operation ............................. 234, 344, 377

MP3/WMA/AAC ............. 201, 210, 252, 265 Playing a CD ................................... 201, 252 Recommended CDs ................................ 292 Recommended Devices ........................... 294 Remote Controls ..................................... 190 Security Code ......................................... 189 Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 234 Status Area ............................................. 230 Theft Protection ...................................... 189 USB Flash Drives...................... 210, 265, 294 USB Port ................................................. 187 Wallpaper Setup ............................. 195, 222

Audio/Information Screen ............... 193, 216 Audio/Information Touch Screen............ 218 Authorized Manuals ................................ 593 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 128

Customize .............................. 112, 309, 332 Auto High-Beam (High Beam Support System).................................................... 148 Indicator ................................................... 83

Automatic Intermittent Wipers .............. 153 Automatic Lighting.................................. 146 Automatic Transmission

Creeping................................................. 429 Fluid ....................................................... 526 Kickdown ............................................... 429

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 599

Operating the Shift Lever .................. 20, 435 Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 569 Shifting................................................... 434

Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 188 Average Fuel Economy .................... 100, 104 Average Speed ......................................... 105

B Battery ...................................................... 546

Charging System Indicator ................ 71, 572 Jump Starting ......................................... 566 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 546 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 547

Belts (Seat).................................................. 34 Beverage Holders ..................................... 173 Bluetooth Audio............................. 213, 268 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ............ 343, 374 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 65 Brake System ............................................ 479

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 481 Brake Assist System................................. 482 Fluid ....................................................... 527 Foot Brake .............................................. 480 Indicator ........................................... 70, 574 Parking Brake.......................................... 479

Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 70 Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 70 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 154 Bulb Replacement .................................... 529

Brake Lights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker/Taillights .................................... 533

Fog Lights................................................ 531 Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 531 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights........ 532 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker/Parking Lights .................................................... 532

Headlights ............................................... 529 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 534 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 531 Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 534 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... 531

Bulb Specifications ........................... 582, 584

C Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 66 Cargo Hooks ............................................. 177 Carrying Cargo.................................. 413, 415 CD Player ........................................... 201, 252 Center Pocket ........................................... 172 Certification Label .................................... 586 Changing Bulbs......................................... 529 Charging System Indicator ................. 71, 572 Child Safety ................................................. 54

Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 132 Child Seat .................................................... 54

Booster Seats............................................. 65 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 56

Child Seat for Small Children..................... 57 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.................................................. 61

Larger Children ......................................... 64 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 58 Using a Tether........................................... 63

Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 552 Cleaning the Interior................................ 550 Climate Control System............................ 180

Changing the Mode ................................ 180 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 181

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 549 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 180 Sensors ................................................... 183 Synchronized Mode................................. 182 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 180

Clock.......................................................... 116 Clutch Fluid............................................... 527 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM)................................................. 483

Coat Hook................................................. 177 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 483

Compact Spare Tire .................. 557, 583, 585 Compass .................................................... 409 Console Compartment ............................. 171 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

Creeping ................................................. 429 Fluid........................................................ 525

599

600

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 600

Kickdown ................................................ 429 Operating the Shift Lever ................... 19, 431 Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 569 Shifting.................................................... 430

Controls ..................................................... 115 Coolant (Engine)....................................... 523

Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ...................................................... 523

Adding to the Radiator ............................ 524 Overheating............................................. 570

Creeping (Automatic Transmission/CVT) ............... 429

Cruise Control ........................................... 442 Indicator .................................................... 81

Cup Holders............................................... 173 Customer Service Information ................. 594 Customized Features ................ 106, 298, 316

D Daytime Running Lights........................... 151 Dead Battery ............................................. 566 Defaulting All the Settings .............. 315, 339 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows.................................................. 181

Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 587 Dimming

Headlights ............................................... 145 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 159

Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 518 Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 145

Display Button .................................. 193, 216 Door Mirrors ............................................. 160 Doors ......................................................... 118

Auto Door Locking .................................. 128 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 128 Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 33, 77 Keys ........................................................ 118 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside .................................................... 126

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ................................................. 121

Lockout Prevention System...................... 125 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 540 Driving ...................................................... 411

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 447 Automatic Transmission/CVT ................... 429 Braking ................................................... 479 Cruise Control......................................... 442 Shifting Gear................................... 434, 438 Shifting Position ...................................... 430 Starting the Engine.......................... 421, 423

Driving Position Memory System ............ 156 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 549

E Eco Assist System ........................................ 9 ECON Button ............................................ 441 Elapsed Time............................................. 104 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator............................................ 77, 574

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 471 Emergency ................................................ 580 Emergency Engine Stop........................... 565 Emergency Trunk Opener ....................... 132 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 589 Engine....................................................... 586

Coolant .................................................. 523 Jump Starting ......................................... 566 Oil .......................................................... 517 Remote Engine Start ............................... 425 Starting........................................... 421, 423 Switch Buzzer ......................................... 140

Engine Coolant ........................................ 523 Adding to the Engine Coolant Reserve Tank ..................................................... 523

Adding to the Radiator ........................... 524 Overheating............................................ 570 Temperature Gauge.................................. 98

Engine Oil ................................................. 517 Adding ................................................... 520 Checking ................................................ 518 Displaying Oil Life ........................... 505, 509 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 71, 572 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 517

ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 141 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ............................................... 77, 574

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide).. 66 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 552 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 160

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 601

F Features .................................................... 185 Filters

Dust and Pollen....................................... 549 Oil .......................................................... 521

Flat Tire..................................................... 557 Floor Mats ................................................ 551 Fluids

Automatic Transmission .......................... 526 Brake/Clutch ........................................... 527 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .................................................... 525

Engine Coolant ....................................... 523 Manual Transmission .............................. 525 Windshield Washer ................................. 528

FM/AM Radio ................................... 199, 239 Fog Light Indicator .................................... 80 Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 168 Foot Brake ................................................ 480 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 44 Front Seats................................................ 161

Adjusting ................................................ 161 Front Sensor Camera ............................... 445 Fuel ..................................................... 22, 497

Economy................................................. 499 Gauge ...................................................... 98 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 100, 105 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 75 Range ............................................. 101, 104 Recommendation.................................... 497 Refueling ................................................ 497

Fuel Economy............................................ 499 Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 22, 498

Message.................................................. 573 Fuel Fill Door....................................... 22, 498 Fuses .......................................................... 576

Inspecting and Changing......................... 579 Locations......................................... 576, 578

G Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy ................................................. 499 Gauge ....................................................... 98 Information ............................................. 497 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 100, 105 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75 Refueling................................................. 497

Gauges ........................................................ 98 Gear Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission........................... 434 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ..................................................... 430

Manual Transmission ............................... 439 Glass (care) ........................................ 550, 553 Glove Box .................................................. 171

H Halogen Bulbs........................................... 529 Handling the Unexpected ........................ 555 HandsFreeLink (HFL) ....................... 343, 374

Auto Answer........................................... 358 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History.................................... 360, 388

Automatic Transferring............................ 358 Displaying Messages................................ 403 Displaying Text Messages ........................ 371 HFL Buttons..................................... 343, 374 HFL Menus ...................................... 345, 378 HFL Status Display ........................... 344, 376 In Case of Emergency.............................. 407 Limitations for Manual Operation .... 344, 377 Making a Call.................................. 364, 396 Options During a Call ...................... 369, 400 Phone Setup.................................... 350, 383 Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 392 Receiving a Call ............................... 368, 399 Receiving a Text Message ........................ 370 Receiving a Text Message/E-mail.............. 401 Ring Tone........................................ 359, 387 Selecting a Mail Account ......................... 402 Speed Dial....................................... 361, 389 To Create a Security PIN .......................... 357 To Set Up Text Message Options ............. 355 To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options... 386

Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4 HD RadioTM ............................................... 239 Head Restraints ........................................ 164 Headlights................................................. 145

Aiming .................................................... 529 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 148 Automatic Operation............................... 146

601

602

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 602

Dimming ......................................... 145, 151 Operating ................................................ 145

Heaters (Seat)............................................ 179 High Beam Indicator................................... 79 Hill Start Assist System...................... 422, 427 HomeLink Universal Transceiver ............ 340 Honda SensingTM......................................... 23 HondaLink ............................................... 270

I Identification Numbers

Engine and Transmission.......................... 586 Vehicle Identification ............................... 586

Ignition Switch.......................................... 140 Illumination Control

Knob ....................................................... 154 Immobilizer System .................................. 133

Indicator .................................................... 80 Indicators..................................................... 70

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) ..... 85 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (White) ............................................ 85, 448

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 75 Auto High-Beam (Amber) .......................... 83 Auto High-Beam (Green) ........................... 83 Brake System (Amber)................................ 70 Brake System (Red) .................................... 70 Charging System ............................... 71, 572 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 87

CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 81, 443 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 81, 442 Door and Trunk Open ............................... 77 ECON Mode...................................... 81, 441 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System.. 77, 574 Fog Light................................................... 80 High Beam ................................................ 79 Immobilizer System ................................... 80 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber)................................................... 86

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (White) ............................................ 86, 466

Light Control............................................. 82 Lights On .................................................. 79 Low Fuel ................................................... 75 Low Oil Pressure................................ 71, 572 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 78, 475, 477 Maintenance Minder ......................... 81, 505 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 71, 573 Parking Brake and Brake System........ 70, 574 Parking Sensor System............................... 77 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ............. 84 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 35, 74 Security System Alarm ............................... 80 Smart Entry System ................................... 82 Starter System ........................................... 82 Supplemental Restraint System............ 51, 75 System Message........................................ 79 Transmission ............................................. 74 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 79

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System ............................................ 76, 471

VSA OFF.......................................... 76, 472 Washer Level ............................................ 81

Information .............................................. 581 Information Display ................................... 99 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 100, 105 Instrument Panel........................................ 69

Brightness Control .................................. 154 Interior Lights........................................... 169 Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 159 iPod ........................................... 204, 255, 294

J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 560 Jump Starting ........................................... 566

K Key Number Tag ...................................... 119 Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 125 Keys........................................................... 118

Lockout Prevention ................................. 125 Master Keys ............................................ 118 Number Tag............................................ 119 Remote Engine Start ............................... 425 Remote Transmitter ................................ 123 Types and Functions................................ 118 Valet Key ........................................ 119, 131 Wont Turn ............................................... 26

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 603

Kickdown (Automatic Transmission/CVT) .............. 429

L Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 464 LaneWatchTM ............................................ 473 Language (HFL) ................................ 344, 376 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 59 Lights ................................................ 145, 529

Auto High-Beam ..................................... 148 Automatic............................................... 146 Bulb Replacement ................................... 529 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 151 Fog Lights ............................................... 147 High Beam Indicator ................................. 79 Interior.................................................... 169 Light Switches......................................... 145 Lights On Indicator.................................... 79 Turn Signals ............................................ 145

Load Limits ............................................... 415 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 118

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 128 From Inside ............................................. 126 From Outside .......................................... 121 Keys........................................................ 118 Using a Key............................................. 125

Lockout Prevention System ..................... 125 Low Battery Charge ................................. 572 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75 Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 71, 572

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength .................................................. 120

Lower Anchors ............................................ 59 Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 582, 584 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 415

M Maintenance ............................................. 501

Battery .................................................... 546 Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 527 Cleaning.................................................. 550 Climate Control System ........................... 549 Coolant ................................................... 523 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 505 Oil ........................................................... 518 Precautions.............................................. 502 Radiator .................................................. 524 Remote Transmitter ................................. 547 Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 529 Safety ...................................................... 503 Service Items ................................... 507, 511 Tires ........................................................ 537 Transmission Fluid ................................... 525 Under the Hood ...................................... 513

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 71, 573 Manual Transmission................................ 438 Map Lights ................................................ 170 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 415 Meters, Gauges ........................................... 98 Mirrors....................................................... 159

Adjusting ................................................ 159 Door ....................................................... 160 Exterior ................................................... 160 Interior Rearview ..................................... 159

Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 500 Moonroof ................................................. 139 MP3 ................................... 201, 210, 252, 265 Multi-Information Display ....................... 102 Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 496

N Numbers (Identification).......................... 586

O Odometer ......................................... 100, 104 Oil (Engine)............................................... 517

Adding.................................................... 520 Checking................................................. 518 Displaying Oil Life............................ 505, 509 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 71, 572 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 517 Viscosity .................................................. 517

Open Source Licences............................... 297 Opening/Closing

Hood....................................................... 515 Moonroof ............................................... 139 Power Windows...................................... 136 Trunk ...................................................... 129

Outside Temperature Display.......... 101, 105

603

604

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 604

Overheating .............................................. 570

P Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ................ 432

Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode) ......................... 436

Pandora ........................................... 209, 262 Panic Mode ............................................... 135 Parking ...................................................... 491 Parking Brake............................................ 479 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ............................................ 70, 574

Parking Sensor System.............................. 492 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 52 Passing Indicators ..................................... 145 Playing Bluetooth Audio ................ 213, 268 Power Windows........................................ 136 Precautions While Driving

Rain......................................................... 428 Pregnant Women ....................................... 39 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 557

R Radiator..................................................... 524 Radio (AM/FM).................................. 199, 239 Radio (SiriusXM)...................................... 244 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 200, 242 Range ................................................ 101, 104

RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 200, 242 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 589 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 155

Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 168 Rear Seat Access ....................................... 167 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 159 Refueling .................................................. 497

Fuel Gauge................................................ 98 Gasoline.................................. 497, 582, 584 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 75

Regulations............................... 477, 540, 587 Remote Engine Start ................................ 425 Remote Transmitter ................................. 123 Replacement

Battery .................................................... 547 Bulbs....................................................... 529 Fuses............................................... 576, 578 Tires ........................................................ 543 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 535

Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 588 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 100, 104 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 460

Indicator.................................................... 84 On and Off.............................................. 461

S Safe Driving ................................................ 29 Safety Check ............................................... 33 Safety Labels............................................... 67

Safety Message ............................................ 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 34

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 36 Checking .................................................. 40 Fastening .................................................. 37 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ................................................. 61

Pregnant Women...................................... 39 Reminder .................................................. 35 Warning Indicator ............................... 35, 74

Seat Heaters ............................................. 179 Seats.......................................................... 161

Adjusting ................................................ 161 Front Seats.............................................. 161 Rear Seat Access ..................................... 167 Rear Seats............................................... 168 Seat Heaters ........................................... 179

Security System ........................................ 133 Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 80 Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 80

SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 103 Select/Reset Knob ...................................... 99 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 192 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 436

Operation ............................................... 437 Shift Lever .......................... 19, 430, 434, 438

Operation ......................... 19, 431, 435, 438 Releasing ................................................ 569 Wont Move ........................................... 569

Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 72, 431, 435

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 605

Shifting (Transmission) ............ 430, 434, 438 Side Airbags ............................................... 48 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 50 Siri Eyes Free ........................................... 285 SiriusXM Radio ....................................... 244 Smart Entry Remote......................... 118, 425 Smart Entry with Push Button Start System ..................................................... 121

Snow Tires ................................................ 545 Song By VoiceTM (SBV).............................. 258 Spare Tire ................................. 557, 583, 585 Spark Plugs ....................................... 582, 584 Specifications ........................................... 582 Specified Fuel ........................... 497, 582, 584 Speedometer .............................................. 98 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 44 Starting the Engine.......................... 421, 423

Does Not Start ........................................ 563 Engine Switch Buzzer.............................. 140 Jump Starting ......................................... 566 Remote Engine Start ............................... 425

Steering Wheel Adjusting ................................................ 158

Stopping ................................................... 491 Summer Tires............................................ 545 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 178 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 44 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 4, 5, 140

SYNC Mode .............................................. 182 System Message Indicator ......................... 79

T Tachometer ................................................. 98 Temperature

Outside Temperature Display ........... 101, 105 Temperature Sensor ................. 101, 105, 183 Time (Setting) ........................................... 116 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..................................................... 475 Indicator ............................................ 78, 575

Tires ........................................................... 537 Air Pressure ............................. 538, 583, 585 Checking and Maintaining....................... 537 Inspection................................................ 537 Labeling .................................................. 538 Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 557 Regulations ............................................. 540 Rotation .................................................. 544 Spare Tire ................................ 557, 583, 585 Summer .................................................. 545 Tire Chains .............................................. 545 Wear Indicators ....................................... 542 Winter ..................................................... 545

Tools .......................................................... 556 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 417

Equipment and Accessories ..................... 418 Load Limits .............................................. 417

Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 420 Emergency .............................................. 580

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)......... 475 Indicator ............................................ 78, 575

Transmission ............................. 430, 434, 438 Automatic ............................................... 434 Continuously Variable (CVT) .................... 430 Fluid................................................ 525, 526 Manual ................................................... 438 Number................................................... 586 Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 72, 431, 435

Trip Meter......................................... 100, 104 Troubleshooting....................................... 555

Blown Fuse...................................... 576, 578 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 27 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 27 Emergency Towing.................................. 580 Engine Wont Start.................................. 563 Noise When Braking.................................. 28 Overheating ............................................ 570 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 557 Shift Lever Wont Move........................... 569 Warning Indicators .................................... 70

Trunk......................................................... 129 Lid........................................................... 129 Light Bulb........................................ 582, 584 Main Switch ............................................ 131

Turn Signals .............................................. 145 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 79

U Unlocking the Doors ................................ 121 Unlocking the Doors from the Inside........ 13 USB Flash Drives ....................... 210, 265, 294

605

606

In d

ex

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 606

USB Port .................................................... 187 Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System............................................. 121

V Valet Key ........................................... 119, 131 Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7 Vehicle Identification Number................. 586 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) .................. 471

Off Button ............................................... 472 Off Indicator .............................................. 76 System Indicator ........................................ 76

Ventilation ................................................ 180 Viscosity (Oil)............................. 517, 583, 585 Voice Control Operation .......................... 235

Audio Commands.................................... 237 Climate Control Commands .................... 238 General Commands................................. 238 Music Search Commands......................... 238 On Screen Commands ............................. 238 Phone Commands ................................... 237 Useful Commands ................................... 237 Voice Portal Screen .................................. 236 Voice Recognition.................................... 235

VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 471

W Wallpaper.......................................... 195, 222 Warning and Information Messages ... 88, 90

Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 572 Warning Labels........................................... 67 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 591

Watts ................................................. 582, 584 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 542 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 560 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 275 Window Washers ..................................... 152

Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 528 Switch..................................................... 152

Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 136 Windshield................................................ 152

Cleaning ......................................... 550, 553 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 181 Washer Fluid ........................................... 528 Wiper Blades ........................................... 535 Wipers and Washers................................ 152

Winter Tires Snow Tires .............................................. 545 Tire Chains .............................................. 545

Wipers and Washers................................. 152 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 153 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 535

Wireless Charger ...................................... 175 WMA ................................. 201, 210, 252, 265 Worn Tires ................................................ 537

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 607

17 ACCORD 2D GAS (KA KC KL)-31T3L6400.book 608

31T3L640 OM05713 00X31-T3L-6401

owners.honda.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Accord Coupe Honda works, you can view and download the Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Navigation Manual for Honda Accord Coupe as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Navigation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda Accord Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda Accord Coupe 2017 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.